DK201670627A1

DK201670627A1 - User interface for camera effects

Info

Publication number: DK201670627A1
Application number: DKPA201670627A
Authority: DK
Inventors: Behkish J Manzari; Pavel Pivonka; Marek Bereza
Original assignee: Apple Inc
Priority date: 2016-06-12
Filing date: 2016-08-16
Publication date: 2018-02-12
Also published as: DK179635B1

Abstract

The present disclosure generally relates to camera user interfaces. In some examples, the electronic device transitions between user interfaces for capturing photos based on data received from a first camera and a second camera. In some examples, the electronic device provides enhanced zooming capabilities that result in visual pleasing results for a displayed digital viewfinder and for captured videos. In some examples, the electronic device provides user interfaces for transitioning a digital viewfinder between a first camera with an applied digital zoom to a secood camera with no digital zoom.

Description

<¹θ> DANMARK <¹°> DK 2016 70627 A1

<¹²> PATENTANSØGNING

Patent- og

Varemærkestyrelsen (51)

Int.CI.:

G 06 F

3/0488 (2013.01)

3/041 (2006.01)

G 06 F 3/0484(2013.01)

H 04 N 5/232 (2006.01) (21) Ansøgningsnummer: PA 2016 70627 (22) Indleveringsdato: 2016-08-16 (24) Løbedag: 2016-08-16 (41) Aim. tilgængelig: 2017-12-13 (30) Prioritet: 2016-06-12 US 62/349,059 (71) Ansøger: Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA (72) Opfinder: Behkish J. Manzari, 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 CA California, USA Pavel Pivonka, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA Marek Bereza, c/o Apple Inc., 1 Infinite Loop, Cupertino, 95014 California, USA (74) Fuldmægtig: Zacco Denmark A/S, Arne Jacobsens Allé 15, 2300 København S, Danmark (54) Benævnelse: User interface for camera effects (56) Fremdragne publikationer:

US 2014/0327639 A1 US 2014/0063313 A1 EP 2487613 A1 US 2013/0038546 A1 US 2012/0169776 A1 US 2016/0044236 A1 (57) Sammendrag:

Fortsættes ...

DK 2016 70627 A1 iooo

DK 2016 70627 A1

USER INTERFACE FOR CAMERA EFFECTS

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

JÖÖÖi J ins application claims priority to the following co-pending provisional applications: U.S, Patent Application Serial No. 62/349.059, entitled “USER INTERFACE FOR GAME R.A EFFECTS”, filed June 12,2016. winch is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIELD (00021 The present disclosure relates generally to computer user Interfaces of electronic devices, particularly devices having built-in cameras.

BACKGROUND |0OO3 j The use of electron ic devices for recording videos and taking pictures has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary electronic devices for recording videos and taking pictures include smart phones and hand-held cameras. Such devices frequently include a viewfinder, which the user can use for previewing before taking a picture or recording a video.

BRIEF SUMMARY [00041 Some techniques for managing camera effects using electronic devices, however, are generally cumbersome and inefficient For example, modifying fhe visual effects in viewfinders such that captured images and recorded videos exhibit the visual effects often requires extensive user input and Is imprecise. For example, some existing techniques use a complex and timeconsuming user interface, which may Include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than necessary, wasting user time and device energy. This latter consideration ts particularly important in battery-operated devices.

[0005] Accordingly, the present technique provides electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interlaces for managing camera effects. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace other methods for managing camera effects. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on a user and produce a more efficient humanmachine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces

DK 2016 70627 A1 conserve power and increase the time between battery charges, in some examples, the techniques provide simulated optical effects in camera viewfinders and captured in tages without requiring additional hardware components, in some examples, the techniques provide the ability to quickly transition between user interfaces for capturing photos based on data received from a first camera and a second camera with limited user input, in some examples, the techniques efficiently provide enhanced zooming capabilities that result in visual pleasing results for a displayed digital viewfinder and for captured videos. In some examples, the techniques efficiently provide user interfaces for transitioning a digital viewfinder between a first camera with an applied digital zoom to a second camera with no digital zoom. Such techniques reduce the number of required user inputs and conserve battery power.

[0006] In accordance with some embodiments, a method ts performed at an electronic dev me with a first camera, a second camera, and a display. The method, comprises: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder; in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from tire first camera and the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

(00071 hi accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stoics one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder: in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed hi the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the

DK 2016 70627 A1 second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not. met, displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

(OOtiSI In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic de\ ice is described. I he electronic device comprises: a first camera; a second camera; a display; one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to he executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder; in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherei n a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and fire second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect, [0000| In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a first camera; a second camera; and a display; means for displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder: in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, means for applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, means for displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

[OOI0| In accordance with some embodiments, a transitoty computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a .3

DK 2016 70627 A1 first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera: and while displaying the digital viewfinder: in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data, received from the first camera and the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

|00U[ In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device wife a first camera, a second camera, and a display. The method, comprises: concurrently displaying, on the display: a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder wife a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying fee magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras; detecting activation of the affordanee; in response to detecting activation of the affordance: ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and displaying, on fee display, a user interface tor capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than fee first magnification, {00121 in accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: concurrently displaying, on the display: a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from fee first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magni fication of photos captured by fee device using one or more of the first and second cameras; detecting activation of the affordance; in response to detecting activation of the affordanee: ceasing to dispiay, on the display, the user

DK 2016 70627 A1 interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that 'includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

[0013] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a first camera; a second camera; a display; one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: concurrently displaying, on the display: a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordanee for modifying the magnificati on of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras; detecting activation of the affordanee; in response to detecting activation of the affordanee: ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from trie first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

10014] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a first camera; a second camera; and a display; means for concurrently displaying, on the display: a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordanee for modifying die magnification of photos capturedby the device using one or more of the first and second cameras; means for detecting activation of die affordanee; in response to detecting activation of the affordanee: means for ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and means for displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

10015] In accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. Tire transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more

DK 2016 70627 A1 programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a first, camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for; concurrently displaying, on the display; a user interface tor capturing photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras; detecting activation of the affordance; in response to detecting activation of the affordance^- ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that, is greater than the first magnification.

[0ΟΪ6[ In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a one or more cameras and a display. The method, comprises: displaying, on ihe display; a digital viewfinder based on data received trom the one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a. gesture that progresses at a. gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a th ird magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from die second magnification level to a third magnification level, including: during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that Is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of fire gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that Is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

[00171 in accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with one or more cameras and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display: a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to

DK 2016 70627 A1 a third magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level including: during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing ; and during a second portion of the gesture that occ urs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

[0018} In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic dev ice comprises: one or more cameras; a display; one or more processors; and a memory' storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display: a digital viewfinder based on data received from tlie one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses ai a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including: during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a secoud portion ofthe gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

[00191 accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: one or more cameras; and a display; means for displaying, on the display; a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including: during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the

DK 2016 70627 A1 gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second, rate that is faster than the gesture rate af which the gesture is progressing.

[0020| hi accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with one or more cameras and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for; displaying, on the display; a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or snore cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including; during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

[0021I in accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display. The method, comprises: displaying, on the display: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder; detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance wi th a determination that, the set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

|0022i In accordance with some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more

DK 2016 70627 A1 programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instrueuons for; displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder; detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

[0023} In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises: a display; one or more processors: and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, die one or more programs including instructions for: displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder; detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of die set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between die second magnification level and a third magnification level Is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a detennination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

[0024j hi accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device is described. The electronic device comprises; a display; and means for displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder; means for detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; means for determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, means for zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

DK 2016 70627 A1 )0025] hi accordance with some embodiments, a transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with a display, the one or more programs including instructions for; displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder; detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when tire difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in. accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

{0()26) Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included sn a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0027] Thus, devices are provided with fester, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing camera effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace other methods for managing camera effects.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES {0028) For a better understanding of fhe various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures, )0029] FIG, IA is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touchsensitive display in accordance with some embodiments, )0030] FIG, 1Ö is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70627 A1 )0031] FIG, 2 illustrates a portable multi function device having a touch screen in accordance wife some embodiments.

(0032] FIG, 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

)0033) FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interlace for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

)0034) FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user intet dice lor a multi function device wife a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.

)0035] FIG. 5A illustrates a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

)0036) FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodimeuts.

)0037) FIGS. 5C-5D illustrate exemplary' components of a personal electronic device having a touch-sensitive display and intensity sensors in accordance with some embodiments.

)0038) FIGS. 5E-5H i llustrate exemplary components and user interlaces of a personal electronic device in accordance wife some embodiments.

)0030) FIGS. 6A-6Q Illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects, in accordance wife some embodiments.

)0040) FIGS. 7A-7B is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments.

)0041) FIGS. 8A-8H Illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects, in accordance wife some embodiments.

)0042) FIG, 9 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0043] FIG S. 10A-10T illustrate exemplary devices and user interlaces for managing camera effects, in accordance wnh some embodiments.

[0044] FIG, ! 1 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0045] FIGS. 12A-121 illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0046] FIG. 13 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing accordance with some embodiments.

camera effects, tn [0047] FIGS, 14-17 are functional block diagrams, in accordance with some embodiments

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS [0048] The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, and the like. It should foe recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present disclosure hut is instead provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

[0049] Efficient device packaging allows desirable, highly-portable electronic devices to foe designed and manufactured. But, some electronic device components complicate the design of smaller devices, particularly thinner ones. Camera sensors and related components constitute an example; they involve physical components organized along optical trains that lend to thicker designs. Consider, for instance, the ability of a camera (e.g., CCD sensor and related lenses) to perform variable optical zooming depends on the arrangement of moveable (e.g., motorized) lens(es) among an optical train. When incorporated into cellular phones, the usual orientation of camera components is at odds with the form-factor of the overall phone; the camera’s optical train typical ly runs along the thickness of foe device. The use of cameras of thinner design·.....

such as fixed focal length cameras·“-introduces other issues. Namely, fixed focal length cameras do not have variable, optical zoom capabilities. While it is still possible to perform digital zooming, digital zooming impacts image quality. .Another issue with traditional cellular phone cameras is that the size ofthe entrance pupil on the camera is relatively small as compared to traditional camera system, such as an SLR. As a result of foe small entrance pupil ofthe camera

DK 2016 70627 A1 lens, some of the artistic photographic effects that are achievable using a traditional SLR camera, such as the bokeh effect, are simply not achievable using a traditional mobile phone camera.

[0050] The embodiments described herein include electronic devices that utilize multiple cameras to pros rue improved camera capabilities. In some embodiments, multiple cameras of fixed focal length are used with variable digital magnification to mimic optical zooming capabilities. In some embodiments, multiple cameras of fixed focal length are used to mimic, or simulate, a bokeh effect. The described embodiments also include complementary user interfaces that enable these improved camera capabilities.

[0051] To gether, the described embodiments permit efficient packaging and production of thin and light devices, while improving the performance of the device's camera optical capabilities. The use of fixed focal length cameras is beneficial as they are thinner and smaller than their variable focal length counterparts. The use of multiple cameras provides the user the ability to optically zoom as well as provides the user an ability to capture more pleasing photos by simulating the bokeh effect. Intuitive user interfaces allow users to leverage the benefits of multiple on-board cameras without placing undue cognitive burdens on the user, thereby producing a more efficient human-machine interface. In battery-operated embodiments, the described embodiments also conserve power and increase run-time between battery charges, as the use of fixed focal length cameras to simulate optical zooming avoids battery consumption by motorized lenses used in conventional variable, optical zooming cameras.

Below, FIGS, 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5H provide a description of exemplary devices tor performing the techniques for managing camera effects. FIGS. 6A-6Q illustrate exemplar;/ devices and user Interfaces for managing camera effects. FIGS. 7A-7B is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing camera effects in accordance with some embodiments. The devices and user interfaces in FIGS, 6A-6Q are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7 A-7B, FIGS, 8A-8H illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing camera effects. FIG. 9 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing camera effects in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in FIGS. 8A-8H are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 9, FIGS. 10A-I OT illustrate exemplary devices and user interlaces lor managing camera effects.

DK 2016 70627 A1

HG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing camera effects in accordance with some embodiments. The devices and user interfaces in FIGS. 10A--10T are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in HG. '1I. FIGS. Ι 2Α~12ί illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects, FIG, 13 is a flow diagram illustrating methods of managing camera effects in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in. FIGS. .1.2A-121 are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in HG. 13.

|00531 Although the following description uses terms ‘'first/' “second/ ' etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms, These terms are oniy used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first touch could be termed a second touch, and, similarly, a second touch could he termed a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first touch and the second touch are both touches, but they are not the same touch.

]0O54| The terminology used in the description ofthe various described embodiments herein is for fhe purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to he limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, It will also he understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including/ “comprises/’ and/or “comprising/’ when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof, {0055] The term “IF is, optionally, construed to mean “when“ or “upon or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting.” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

DK 2016 70627 A1

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interikces for such devices, and associated processes tor using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch·®, and iPad® devices from Apple inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touchpad).

{0057( In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should he understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interlace devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.

[0058] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following; a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web brow sing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

(0059( The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at ieast one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to tire next, and/or within a respective application. In this way. a common physical surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of architecture (such as the touch-sensitive applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

DK 2016 70627 A1 (0060( Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touchsensitive displays, FIG, i A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 1 '12 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system,” Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory* controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118. R.F circuitry iOS, audio circuitry 110, speaker ill, microphone 113, input/output (ί/Ö) subsystem 106» other input control devices 3 36, and external port 124, Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 364. Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors i 65 for detecting* intensity* of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signs lines 103.

(0061( As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touchsensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a linger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g,, at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used io measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surfece and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally.

DK 2016 70627 A1 used as a substitute for the force or pressure of toe contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an'intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded fe.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure), Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g.. via a touch-sensitive dispiay. a touchsensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button), [0062 j As used In foe specification and claims, the terra “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of toe device, physical displacement of a component (e.g,, a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g,, housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a percei ved ch ange in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.

For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or ‘top click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement, of the touch-sensitive surface is., optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to toe individualized sensory perceptions of the user, toere are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as

DK 2016 70627 A1 corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click” a “down click,” “roughness”}, unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that wi l l generate the descri bed sensory perception for a typical (or average) user, [0063] It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.

[OOM] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash manoty devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 optionally controls access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, [0065] Peripherals interlace 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 io perform various functions for device 100 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104, fit some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

[0066] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals, RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/frora electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, Including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity' module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth, RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a io

DK 2016 70627 A1 wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 108 opt onally includes weil-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM's, Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA). Evolution. Data-Only (EVDO), HSPA, HSPA-fo Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA),, long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDM.A), Bluetooth. Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.1 la, IEEE 802.1 lb. IEEE 802.11 g, IEEE 802.1 In, and/or IEEE 802,1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g,, extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol tor Instant .Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE). Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), ander Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0067] Audio circuitry’ 110, speaker 111, aud microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry’ 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111, Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry’ 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0068] 10 subsystem 106 couples input-output peripherals oo device i00, such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices ί 16, to peripherals interface 118. 1/0 subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 5 58, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 116. The other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.}, dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port a USB port, and a pointer act see such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 20S. FIG. 2) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113, The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g,, 206, FIG. 2).

10069] A quick press of the push button optionally disengages a lock of touch screen 112 or optionally begins a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described hi U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestütes on an Unlock hnage,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S, Pat, No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, A longer press of the push button (e.g., 206) optionally turns power to device 100 on or off. The functionality of one or more of the buttons are, optionally, user-customizable. Touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft burtons and one or more soft keyboards.

[0070] Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interlace and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 112, Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual o utput optionally corresponds to user-interface objects.

[0071} Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic anchor tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and'or sets of instructions in memory .102)

DK 2016 70627 A1 detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 112 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 112. tn an exemplary' embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 1 12 and tire user corresponds to a finger of the user.

Touch screen 132 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen

112, in an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California, [0073] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is, optionally, analogous to the mul ti-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et at), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S, Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereas touch-sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.

{0074] A touch-sensitive display in some embodimenis of touch screen 112 is described in the following applications: (I) U.S. Patent. Application No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller?’ filed May 2, 2006: (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures for Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July' 30,2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No, 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed .January' 31,2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/038,590. “.Mode-Based Graphical User Interlaces for Touch Sensitive Input Devices?’ filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface?' filed September 16. 2005; (7) U.S. Patent

DK 2016 70627 A1

Application No, 11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No, 11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S, Patent Application No. 11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed March 3,2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

[0075} Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen, in some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0070J In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions, in some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensi ti ve area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0O77| Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AG)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator ie.g.. a light-enutting diode and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices, jOU78| Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164, FIG, 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in TO subsystem 106, Optical sensor 164 optionally includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 164 receives light from the ·»

DK 2016 70627 A1 environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module», optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video, in some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 on tlie front of foe device so that the touch screen display is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on foe front ofthe device so that the user’s image is, optionally, obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. in some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 164 cars be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor hi the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 164 is used along with the touch screen, display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.

|0()79| Device 100 optionally also includes one or tnore contact intensity sensors 165.

FIG. IA shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure ) of a contac t on a touch-sensiti ve surface). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (e.g,, pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from foe environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchsensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one coniaet intensity sensor is located on the back of de vice 100, opposite touch screen display 112, which is located on foe front of device .100.

|O080i Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor .166 coupled to peripherals interlace .1.18. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is, optionally, coupled to input controller 160 in FO subsystem 106. Proximity sensor 166 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11 /241,839, “Proximity Detector in Handheld Device”; 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Acti vity in Portable Devices”; and 1.1/638,251,

DK 2016 70627 A1 “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals?’ which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, in some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifimction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

|0081] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167,

FIG, 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator 167 optionaiiy includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensi ty sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback moduie 133 and generates tacti le outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touchsensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100), In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is l ocated on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display .1.12, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0082| Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG. IA shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118, Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionaiiy, coupled to an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106, Accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Accelerationbased Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No, 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to acceierometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown)

DK 2016 70627 A1 and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) ior obtaining information concerning the location and orientation te.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.

[0083] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module {or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136, Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3} stores devtce/globai internal state 157, as shown in FIGS, 1A and 3, Deviee/global internal state 357 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 112; sensor state, including information obtained from fee device’s various sensors and input control devices 116; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude,

10084] Operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS,

WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory’ management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

10085I Communication module 128 facilitates communication wife other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g.. Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is fee same as, or similar to and/or compatible wife, the 30-pin connector used on iPod© (trademark of Apple Inc. ) devices.

|0086] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g.. a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for

DK 2016 70627 A1 performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g,, detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), detennining if there is movement of foe contact and tracking foe movement across the touchsensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of foe point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude n.d'or direction) of foe point of contact. These operations are. optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts te.g.. '‘muititouch’Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

[0087| In some embodiments, coniact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g,, to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g,, the intensify thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical ac tuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device .100), For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can he set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g,, by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality’ of intensity· thresholds at once with a system-level click “inten shy” parameter), (0088] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected bydetecting a particular contact pattem. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at foe same

DK 2016 70627 A1 position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-clown event {e.g,, at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a linger swipe gesture on foe touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.

[0089] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components tor rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g,, brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-intertace objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.

[0090( In some embodiments, graphics module 3 32 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code, Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc,, one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

|OO0)1 Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.

[0092] Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mad 140, IM 343, browser 347, and any other application that needs text input s.

[0093( GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 143 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[00941 Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

DK 2016 70627 A1

Contacts module i 37 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

* Telephone module ί 38;

* Video conference module 139;

* E-mai 1 el ient. module 1 40;

* Instant messaging (ΪΜ) module 141;

» Workout support module 142;

* Camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

« image management module 144;

* Video player module;

« Music player module;

* Browser module 147;

* Calendar module 148;

Widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149stocks wulget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alann clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;

* Widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;

* Search module 15i;

• Video and music player module 152, which merges video player module and music player module;

* Notes module 153;

DK 2016 70627 A1 * Map module 154; and/or ♦ Online video module 155.

{0095] Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

(0096] In conjunction with touch screen 112. display controller 156, contact-motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 are, optionally., used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including; adding nameis) to the address book;

deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone muuber(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name;

categorizing and sorting, names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138. video conference module 139, e-mail 140, or ΪΜ 141; and so forth.

[0097( In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker ill, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 are optionally, used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.

(00981 In conjunction with RF circuitry I OS, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone ί 13, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164. optical sensor controller S 58, contact, motion module 130, graphics module 1 32, text input module 134, contacts module 1 37, and telephone module

38, video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to

DK 2016 70627 A1 initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions, {0099) In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-rnatl chem module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response io user instructions, I» conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.

{0100) In conjunction wife RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact, motion module 130, graphics module 132. and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS lor Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages, in some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers io both telephony-based messages (e.g,, messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g,, messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

{0101) In conjunction wife RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module, workout support, module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.

)0102) In conjunction with, touch screen I i 2, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and image

DK 2016 70627 A1 management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream} and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 102.

(0103( In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contaet/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143 , image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., In a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images, (0104( In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact, motion module 130, graphics module 132. and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking io, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

(0105( In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contaet/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, todo lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions, (0106( In conjunction with RF circuitry 108. touch screen 112, display controller 156, contaet/motion module 130. graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are nihu-appiieauons that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 1496), In some embodiments, a widget includes an H TML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) tile, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo* Widgets).

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0107] hi conjunction with RF circuitry i08, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact·motion module 130, graphics module 1 32, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 are, optionally, used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[0108] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria {e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

]0100[ In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 330, graphics module 332, audio circuinw 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play 'back videos (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external, connected display via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc, ).

]0110| In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 353 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

]01111 In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 1 35, and browser module 147, map module 154 are, optionally, used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps {e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [01 12( hi conjunction with touch screen i 12, display controller 1 56, contact''motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 1 ÖS, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g,, by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g,, on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936.562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos.*’ tiled June 20. 2007, and U.S Patent Application No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interlace for Playing Online Videos,” fil ed December 31,2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, |O113| Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g,, the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module is, optionally, combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 152, FIG. 1 A). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory’ 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[01141 In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [01 15} The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100, in such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

{0116} FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG, I A) or 370 (FIG, 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g,, in operating system 326) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137-151, 155, 380-390).

|0U7] Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to w hich to deli ver the e vent information. Event sorter I70 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. in some embodiments., application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.

[01181 ί» some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user Interfece state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling ihe user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

|0i19J Event monitor 1~1 receives event information from peripherals interlace 118. Event information Includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display

112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interfece 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, acoelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 3 30), information that peripherals interfece 118

DK 2016 70627 A1 receives from L'O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 1 12 or a touch-sensitive surface.

)0120) In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface i 18 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g,, receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

(0121) In some embodiments, event sorter i70 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer detenninaiion module 173.

(01221 Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive dispiay 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

)0123) Another aspect ofthe user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in winch information ts displayed and touch-based gestures occur The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least rn part, on the hit view ofthe initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

)0124) Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-evem occurs te.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified hy the hit view determination module

DK 2016 70627 A1

172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to fhe same touch or input source tor which it was identified as the hit view.

{0125] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views witlun a vie w hierarchy should recei ve a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only fee hit view should recei ve a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer detennination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In oilier embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

10126] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer ISO), In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved hv a respective event receiver 3 82.

]0127| in some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170, In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

|0128| In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 19!, each of which includes instructions for handling touch embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more events feat occur within a respective view ofthe application's user interface. Each application view 19! ofthe application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers I SO, In other

3o

DK 2016 70627 A1 of: data updater ί 76, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handier 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192, Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190, Also, in some erabodimenis, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view i91.

[01291 A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identities an event trom the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. in some erabodimenis, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions), [0130| Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events Include rotation of the device front one orientation to another (e.g,, front a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[Ö131I Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g..

predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2). and others.

In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (187) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event i (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap., for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a firsi liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a

DK 2016 70627 A1 predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display 112, and liftoff of the touch (touch end), in some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[0132] In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an es ent for a respective user-interface object, in some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (subevent). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the subevent and the object triggering the hit test, [0133] In some embodiments, the definition tor a respective event (187) also includes delayed actions drat delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.

[0134] When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 180, Ihe respective ev ent recognizer 180 enters an everst impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent subevents of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0135] hi some embodiments, a respective event recognizer ISO includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, author iists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments,

DK 2016 70627 A1 metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled, to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether subevents are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0136] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized, in some embodiments, a respecti ve event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handier 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

(01371 In some embodiments, event delivery instmctions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views recei ve foe event information and perform a predetermined process, |013$| in some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1, For example, data updater 376 updates the telephone number used m contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 152 for display on a touch-sensitive display.

[0139] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0140[ H shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices' 100 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements: biometric inputs: and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

10141] FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (Ul) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not dr awn to scale in the figure ). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when tlie user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

|0142| Device 100 optionally also include one or tnore physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally, executed on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 112.

[0143} In some embodiments, device 100 includes touch screen 112. menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment bution(s)

208. subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210. headset jack 212. and dock ing/c barging

DK 2016 70627 A1 external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button tn the depressed state for a predefined time interval, to lock the device by tiepressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 512 and or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

(0144] FIG, 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry' (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1 A), sensors 359 (e.g,, optical, acceleration, proximity, touchsensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensors) 165 described above with reference to FIG. I A). Memory' 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory¹ 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. I A), or a subset thereof Furthermore, memory 370 optionally

DK 2016 70627 A1 stores additional programs, modales, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multi function device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1 A) optionally does not store these modules.

Each of the above-identified elements in FfG. 3 is, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions tor performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or programs (e.g,, sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[01461 Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that are, optionally, implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 100.

|0147{ E1G, 4/\ illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable mul tifuncüon device

100 iii accordance with some embodiments.

Similar user interlaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof;

• Signal strength indicator(sl 402 for w trelevs eommunieationis), such as cellular and WiFi signals;

* Time 404;

* Bluetooth indicator 405;

* Battery status indicator 406;

* Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as;

DK 2016 70627 A1 icon 4 56 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

o Icon 418 for e-mail client moduie 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of tire number of unread e-mails;

o Icon 420 for browses' moduie 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple inc,) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and • Icons tor other applications, such as:

o Icon424 foi IM module 141 labeled ''Message¹·,'' o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o icon 432 for online video module .155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 438 for weather widget .149-.1, labeled “Weather;” c- Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 442 for workout support moduie 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings appiication or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

|0148( It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG, 4A are merely exemplary.

For example, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 are labeled “Music” or “Music

Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respecti ve application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the

DK 2016 70627 A1 respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

{0149) FIG, 4Ö illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g.. a tablet or touchpad 355. FIG. 3) that is separate from the display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112). Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensor's 359) for detecting intensity' of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 357 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300, {0150) Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface feat is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG, 4B) feat corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG, 4B) on fee display (e.g., 450), In accordance wife these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B) wife the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on fee display (e.g., in FIG, 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by fee device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device io manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device when fhe touch-sensiti ve surface is separate from fhe display, it should be understood feat similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

)0151 { Additionally, while fee following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g,, finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or -more of the finger inputs are replaced wife input from another input device (e.g,, a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced wife a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along fee path of the swipe (e.g , instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over fee location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by

DK 2016 70627 A1 ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

[01521 FIG . 5A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes body 502, In some embodiments, device 500 cat include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (e.g., FIGS. 3 Ä-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has touch-sensitive display screen 504, hereafter touch screen 504. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 100 and 300, in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being appl ied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 504 (or the touch-sensitive surface) can provi de output data that represents the intensity of touches. The u ser i nterface of device 500 can respond to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 500.

[0153] Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: international Patent Application Serial No.

PCT/ÜS2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User interfece for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” hied May 8, 2013, published as WIPO Publication No. WO/2013/169849, and International Patent Application Serial No.

PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interlace for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11,2013, published as WIPO Publication No, WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, [01541 In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508, If included, can be physical. Examples of physi cal input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms, in some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 500 with, lor example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets.

DK 2016 70627 A1 bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 500 to be worn by a user.

[0155] FIG, 5Ö depicts exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 can include some or ah of the components described with respect to FIGS. 1 A, IB. and 3. Device 500 has bus 512 that operatively couples I/O section 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. I/O section 514 can be connected to display 504, which can have touch-sensitive component 522 and, optionally, intensify sensor 524 (e.g,, contact intensity sensor), in addition, FO section 514 can be connected with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 500 can include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508. Input mechanism 506 is, optionally, a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 508 is, optionally, a button, in some examples.

[01561 Input mechanism 5OS is. optionally, a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as GPS sensor 532, accelerometer 534, directional sensor 540 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 536, motion sensor 538, and/or a combination thereof, all of which can be operatively connected to I/O section 514.

Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 can include one or more nontransitory computer-readable storage mediums, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 516, for example, caa cause the computer processors to perform the techniques described below, including processes 700 7A-7B), 900 (FIG, 9), 1100 (FIG. 11), 1300 (FIG. S3). Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 5B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.

[0158] As used here, tire term “affordanee” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, optionally, displayed on tire display screen of devices 100, 300, and/or

500 (FIGS, 1, 3, and 5). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each optionally constitute an affordanee.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0159] As used herein, the term “focus selector· refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, fhe cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG, 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g.. a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g,, touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG, 1A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector'' so that when an input, (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input, hi some implementations, focus i s moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement, of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g , by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by fhe focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element, of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of fhe device).

[0160] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity’' of a contact refers io a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensi ty samples coiiected dining a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1,0.2,0.5, 1, 2,

DK 2016 70627 A1

5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g,, after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement offne contact, prior to detecting an end of the contac t, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, andfor before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact), A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally, based on one or more of: a maximum value of the Intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the Intensities of the contact, a. top S O percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at tire 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the l ike. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time), in some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensify thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.

For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic Intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensify threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensify that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation), rather than being used to determine whether io perform a first operation or a second operation.

[01611 FIG. 5C illustrates detecting a plurality of contacts 552A-552E on touch-sensitive display screen 504 with a plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D. FIG. 5C additionally includes intensify diagrams that show the current intensity measurements of foe intensity sensors 524A.-524D relative to units of intensity, hi this example, the intensity measurements of intensify sensors 524Ä and 524D are each 9 units of intensify, and the intensify measurements of intensify sensors 524B and 524C are each 7 units of intensity, in some implementations, an aggregate intensity is the sum of the intensity measurements of the plurality of intensity sensors 524A-524D, which in tins example is 32 intensity units. In some embodiments, each contact is assigned a respective intensify that is a portion of the aggregate intensify. FIG. 5D illustrates

DK 2016 70627 A1 assigning the aggregate intensity to contacts 552A-552E based on their distance from the center of force 554. in this example, each of contacts 552A, 552B, and 552E are assigned an intensity of contact of 8 intensity units of the aggregate intensity, and each of contacts 552C and 552D are assigned an intensity·' of contact of 4 intensity·' units of the aggregate intensity. More generally, in some implementations, each contact j is assigned a respective intensity ij that is a portion of the aggregate intensity. A, in accordance with a predefined mathematical function, Ij - A-{Dj/ZDi), where Dj is the distance of the respective contact j to the center of force, and EDi is the sum of the distances of all the respective contacts (e.g., i=1 to last) to the center offeree. The operations described with reference to FIGS. 5C-5D can he performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500. Tn some embodiments, a characteristic intensity·' of a contact is based on one or more intensities of the contact, in some embodiments, the intensity sensors are used to determine a single characteristic intensity (e.g,, a single characteristic intensity of a single contact). It should be noted that the intensify diagrams are not part of a displayed user interface, hut are Included in FIGS, 5G-5D to aid the reader.

(0162( in some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is .identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface optionally receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensify of the contact increases, in this example, the characteristic intensify of the contact at the end location is, optionally, based on only·' a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is, optionally, applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm, in some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensify.

(0163( The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface ts. optionally, characterized relative to one or more intensify thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity

DK 2016 70627 A1 thresholds, in some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensify threshold corresponds to an intensity at which fee device will perform operations feat are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad, in some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g,, and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without, performing an operation associated with fee light press intensity threshold or fee deep press intensity threshold.

Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[9164] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensify threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and fee deep press intensify' threshold is sometimes referred to as a. “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of fee contact, from an intensify below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensify’ threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of fee contact from an intensity below the contactdetection intensity threshold to an intensify' between the contact-detection intensify threshold and fee light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touchsurface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact trom an intensity above the contactdetection intensity threshold to an intensify below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from fee touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensify threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.

[0165] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting fee respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensify of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some

DK 2016 70627 A1 embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase tn intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down »nuke” of the respecti ve press input), in some embodiments, the press input includes an'increase in intensity of foe respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and foe respective operation is performed in response fo defecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g.. an “up stroke” ofthe respective press input), [0166] FIGS. 5E-5H illustrate detection of a gesture that includes a press input that corresponds to an i ncrease in intensity of a contact 562 from an intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g.. “TFl”) in FIG. 5E, to aa intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “Π'ο”) in FIG. 5H. The gesture performed with contact 562 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 560 while cursor 576 is displayed over application icon 572B corresponding to App 2, on a displayed user interlace 570 that includes application icons 572A-572D displayed in predefined region 574, In some embodiments, foe gesture is detected on touch-sensitive display 504. The intensity sensors detect foe intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 560. The device determines that the intensity of contact 562 peaked above the deep press intensity threshold (e.g,, “ITd”), Contact 562 is maintained on touch-sensitive surface 560. In response to the detection of the gesture, and in accordance with contact 562 having an intensity Aar goes above foe deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “ITo”) during the gesture, reduced-scale representations 578A578C (e.g., foumbnails) of recently opened documents tor App 2 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 5F-5H. In. some embodiments, the intensity, which is compared to the one or more intensity thresholds, is the characteristic intensity of a contact. It should be noted that the intensity diagram for contact 562 is not part of a displayed user interface, but is included in FIGS, 5E-5H to aid foe reader.

]0167] in some embodiments, the display of representations 578A-578C includes an animation. For example, representation 578Ä is initially displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5F. As foe animation proceeds, representation 578Ä moves upward and representation 578B is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG.

5G. Then, representations 578A moves upward, 578B moves upward toward representation

DK 2016 70627 A1

578A, and representation 578C is displayed in proximity of application icon 572B, as shown in FIG. 5IT Representations 578A-578C form an array above icon 572B. In some embodiments, the animation progresses in accordance with an intensity of contact 562, as shown in FIGS. 5F5G, where the representations 578A-578C appear and move upwards as the intensity of contact 562 increases toward the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT«In some embodiments, the intensity, on which the progress of the animation is based, is the characteristic intensity of the contact. The operations described with reference to FIGS. 5E-5H can he performed using an electronic device similar or identical to device 100, 300, or 500.

JO 168] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “titter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g,, the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or die hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below die hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of die respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of'the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity· ofthe contact or die decrease in intensily ofthe contact, depending on the circumstances).

| 0169] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered In response to detecting either; an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input

DK 2016 70627 A1 intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the byste tests intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to. and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.

|017tt| Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces C‘Gf ’) and associated processes that are implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 1ÖÖ, device 300, or device 500.

{0171( FIGS. 6A-6Q illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces tor simulating an optical effect, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the simulated optical effect processes described below, including the processes in FIGS, 7A-7B.

{0172( FIG. 6A illustrates an exemplary electronic device 600 with a first camera 602 and a second camera 604 that are located, lor example, on the rear of the electronic device. In some examples, the first camera 602 and the second camera 604 have fixed, but different, focal lengths. In some examples, the focal length, field of view, and/or optical magnification properties of the optical system is fixed for each of the cameras (e.g., 602, 604). In some embodiments, in addition to having different fixed fecal lengths, the cameras (e.g., 602,604) have different fixed fields of view and different fixed optical magnification properties.

[01731 In some embodiments, the first camera 602 has a first field of view and the second camera 004 has a second field of \ few. wherein the first field oi view- and the second field of view* overlap, in some examples, the first camera 602 and the second camera 604 are spaced apart so that a parallax between Images detected te.g., captured) by the cameras is used to determine distances to objects represented by different portions of a digital viewfinder displaying image data from one or more of camera 602 and camera 604, hi some embodiments, the first camera 602 and the second camera 604 are located on a surface of the electronic device 600 and the optical axes of the cameras 602 and 604 are arranged such that they are parallel or

S3

DK 2016 70627 A1 substantially parallel, in some examples, the first camera 602 and the second camera 604 capture overlapping fields of view, for example, at least 50% overlapping, at least 90% overlapping, or more, in some examples, the first camera 602 has a wider field of view than the second camera 604, but a lower optical zoom than the second camera. in some examples, tire second camera has a wider field of view than the first camera, but a lower optical zoom than the first camera.

(0174] FIG. 6B illustrates the front of exemplary electronic dev ice 600 including display

612. Ihe electronic device 600 displays, on the display 612, a digital viewfinder 614 including a preview based on data received from the first camera 602. In some embodiments, objects (e.g., 611 A, 61 IB, 615) displayed in the digital viewfinder are located at varying distances from the camera (and/or the electronic device 600), Jh some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS, 6B-6H, data is displayed in the viewfinder without applying a simulated optical effect, such as a bokeh simulated optical effect. In some embodiments, the electronic device displays, on the display 612, the digital viewfinder 614 in response to the electronic device 600 receiving a user input— for example detecting a tap gesture at a location on a touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a camera application affordance (e.g., 430 of FIG. 4A), [0175J In some embodiments, the electronic device 600 displays, on the display 612, a camera mode selection menu 619, which includes affordances eorresponding to various selectable camera modes. In response to die electronic device 600 receiving a signal corresponding to a selec tion of a camera mode, the electronic device 600 configures the camera application for the selected camera mode. For example, FIG. 6B illustrates a “PHOTO” camera mode, or photo mode, diat is active. In some examples, die electronic displays, on the display 612, a camera shutter affordance 617 (e.g,, concurrently with the digital viewfinder 614) which, when activated, causes the electronic device 600 to capture an image, such as by storing, in memory, data from the first camera and/or the second camera, in some examples, the captured image corresponds to the preview displayed In the digital viewfinder 614 (e.g,, at the time die electronic device 6ÖÖ detects activation of the camera shutter affordance 617).

|0i 76| FIG. 6C illustrates electronic device 600 receiving a user input 622 corresponding to an instruction to initiate a camera mode change, in FIG. 6C, ihe electronic device 600 receives

DK 2016 70627 A1 the riser input on the “PORTRAIT” mode menu item displayed on display 612, As a result; the electronic device OÖÖ changes the camera capture mode to the “PORTRAIT” mode, in some examples, the “PORTRAIT” mode, or the portrait mode, corresponds to a simulated optical effect mode, in some embodiments, tire simulated optical effect mode is a mode in which a simulated optical effect is applied to the digital viewfinder when a set of one or more conditions is met, as described below. In some embodiments, the menu name, label, or affordance for the camera mode corresponding, to the simulated optica! effect is varied.

|0177} PIG. 6D illustrates the result of receiving user input 622 in FIG, 6C when the electronic device 600 transitions from tire photo mode as shown in FIG, 6B to the portrait mode. Once the electronic device 600 is in the portrait mode, the portrait menu label is differentiated Irani the remaining menu items so that a user can easily identify when the mode changed has occurred and what mode is selected, in some embodiment, the differentiating can be via, for example, highlighting; bolding, different size font varying font type, or any other mechanism to distinguish tlie selected mode from the non-selected modes, |0178] In FIG, 6E, while displaying the digital viewfinder, the electronic device 600 determines whe ther the set of one or more conditions Is met In some examples, a condition of t he set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected. In the examp le illustrated in FIG. 6E, a subject is not detected because, for example, the subject is too far and the electronic device 600 cannot differentiate the subject from the remaining objects in the scene, hi some examples, as illustrated in FIG. 6E , in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, the electronic device displays, on the display, a graphical indication 642 of a condi tion that is not met. in some examples, as illustrated in FIG, 6E, die electronic device does not detect a subject (e.g., the camera focus is 10m or more) and instructs the user (e.g,, using the graphical indication) to place a subject widiin an acceptable distance (e.g,, within 8 feet and 2.5m), In some examples, an affordance is displayed in the viewfinder to allow a user to disable or enable such instructions. In some examples, in accordance with die determination that the set of one or more conditions are met, the electronic device forgoes displaying, on the display, the graphical indication 642 instructing the user. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device does not instruct the user when user action is not helpful (or required) for applying the simulated optical effect.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [9Γ79] hi some examples, the electronic device detects a subject, but the subject is too far away {e.g., focus is between 2,5m and I Ora), and the electronic device instructs the user ie.g,, using the graphical indication) to move closer to camera (e.g., to within 8 feet), in some examples, fee electronic device determines an amount of light is too low (e.g., 400 lux or less), and instructs fee user (e.g., using the graphical indication) to provide more light In some examples, an affordance is displayed in the viewfinder to allow a user to disable or enable such instructions, in some exa mples, in accordance wife the determination feat fee set of one or more conditions are met: electronic device 600 forgoes displaying, on the display, fee graphical indication instructing the user. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device does not instruct the user when user action is not. helpful for applying the simulated optical effect.

[9180] As illustrated in FIGS. 6E and 6F. in some examples, the electronic device 600 lads to detect the subject, in some examples, in accordance wife failing to detect fee subject, the electronic device 600, displays, in the digital viewfinder 614 on the display, one or more visual markers 636 (e.g., a visual boundary) that are centered in the digital viewfinder, as shown in FIG, 6F. In some examples, in accordance with detecting no subjects, the electronic device 600 displays in the digital viewfinder 614 on the display, one or more visual markers (e.g., a visual boundary) feat is centered in the digital viewfinder. In some examples, the one or more visual markers 636 indicate to the user the area within the scene feat will be placed into focus or otherwise acted on by the electronic device.

[ 0181J As illustrated in FIG. 6G, a condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the electronic device detects a subject within a predetermined distance front fee electronic device 600 (e.g,, a distance front subject to the first camera or to the second camera). In fee example of FIG. 6G, the set of one or more conditions is not met, and thus fee electronic device does not apply the simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder 614. In some embodiments, the electronic device 600 automatically (e.g., without user intervention, without user input), determines a distance to the subject. For example, the electronic device 600 repeatedly (or continuously) tracks the subject and determines the distance to the subject, in some examples, the detennination ofthe distance to the subject is based on a depth map generated based on a parallax effect (e.g., using the first camera and the second camera). In some examples, the determination ofthe distance to the subject is based on a focus distance of

DK 2016 70627 A1 either (or both) the first camera or the second camera, hi some examples, the first condition of the set of one or more conditions includes determining whether; a focus distance is 8 feet or more, a focus distance is within 8 feet and 2.5m, or the amount of light is 400 lux or more. In some embodiments, the determination of whether the first condition is met is based on data from one camera sensor (e.g. focal length). In some embodiments, the detennination of whether the first condition is met is based on data from both the first camera and the second camera. In some embodiments, the electronic device 600 displays a visual marker 636 (e.g.. around the subject, around a portion of foe subject, or around the head and shoulder portion of a person that is foe subject) to indicate that the electronic device 600 detected a subject in the digital viewfinder 614. lu some embodiments, the electronic device does not display the one or more visual markers (e.g., 636) even when the subject is detected, [0I82| As illustrated in FIG, 6H, m some examples, a condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the electronic device detects that an amount of detected light te.g., at the first camera, at the second camera) that exceeds a minimum light threshold. In this example, the detected light (corresponding to the darkness 660) does not exceed the minimum light threshold and is too low for the portrait mode, In some examples, if the amount of light is insufficient for the portrait mode (e.g,, does not exceed the minimum light threshold), the electronic device 600 displays, on the display, an indication to the user that not enough light is present 642. In some embodiments, the minimum light threshold is 100 lux, 200 lux, 300 lux, 400 lux, 300 lux, 600 lux, 700 lux, or some other threshold value determined based on the capabilities of the camera(s) to fonction in low light environments. Thus, in some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied based on the amount of light detected. In some examples, the electronic device 600 instructs the user to improve light conditions by not applying the simulated optical effect when light conditions are not optimal.

[01831 As illustrated in FIGs 6E, 6G, and 6H, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions are not met, the electronic device 600 displays, on the display, a graphical indication 642 of a condition that is not met. in some examples, the electronic device 600 does not detect a subject (e,g._s focus is IGm or more) and instructs the user (e.g., using the graphical indication) to place a subject within, an acceptable distance (e.g., within 8 feet and 2.5m), as illustrated in FIG. 6E, In some examples, the electronic device 600 detects a subject.

DK 2016 70627 A1 but the subject is too far away fe.g., focus is between 10m and 2,5m), and the electronic device 600 instructs the user (e.g., using the graphical indication) to move closer to camera (e.g,, to within 8 feet), as illustrated in FIG. 6G. In some examples, the electronic device 600 determines an amount of light is too low (e.g., 4O0lux or less), and instructs foe user (e,g„ using the graphical indication) to provide more light, as illustrated in FIG. 6H, in some examples, an affordance is displayed in the viewfinder to allow a user to disable or enable such instructions.

In some examples, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device forgoes displaying, on the display, the graphical indication 642 instructing the user. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device 600 does not instruct the user when user action is not helpful for applying the simulated optical effect.

[01841 As illustrated in FIG, 61, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device 600 applies a simulated optical effect 680 (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the second camera.

In tills example, a simulated optical effect 680 is applied to the objects in the background of the scene (e.g,, the trees) and is not applied to the object in the foreground of the scene (e.g., the subject).

[0185j As illustrated in FIG. 61, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device 600 displays, on the display, one or more visual markers 636 around the subject (or a portion of the subject). In some examples, a visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers 636 is updated in response to the determination that the set of one or more conditions Is met. For example, the one or more visual markers 636 illustrated in FIG. 6G indicate that the electronic device 600 has detected a subject in the di gi tal viewfinder, and in response to the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device updates a characteristics (eg., size, location, color ) of the one or more visual markers to provide the user with an indication that die set of one or more conditions is met and, optionaiiy, that the simulated optical effect was (or will he) applied, hr some embodiments, the one or more visual markers 636 are not displayed even when the set of one or more conditions is met and the simulated optical effect is applied.

DK 2016 70627 A1 |øί 86] As illustrated in FIGS. 6B-6H, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, the electronic device 600 displays, on the display, the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 61 and 61, in some examples, tlie simulated optical effect is a simulated bokeh 680. In some embodimen ts, a non-exhaustive list of the possible simulated optical effects includes a bokeh simulated optical effect, a simulated color filter, and a simulated gamma adjustment. Tn some embodiments, the electronic device applies the simulated optical effect such that a first part (e.g., 680) of the preview in the digital viewfinder has a simulated bokeh effect and a second part (e.g., 615) (di fferent from the first part) of the digital viewfinder does not. have a simulated bokeh effect. Thus, in some examples, the digital viewfinder mimics an optical bokeh effect commonly seen in viewfinders of {and images captured with) SLR cameras.

|f)l87| As illustrated in FIGS. 61. and 61, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic dev ice 600 applies a simulated optical effect 680 (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder 614, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera 602 and the second camera 604. in some examples, as illustrated in FIG. 61, the electronic device 600 applies the simulated opticas effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder 6.14 without displaying an indication that the simulated optical effect has been applied and without displaying any visual marker. In some examples, as illustrated in FIG . 61, the electronic device 600 applies the simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in tlie digital viewfinder 614 and displays an indication 675 that the simulated optical effect has been applied and one or more visual markers 636.

In some embodiments, prior to the electronic device 600 applying the simulated opticas effect to the preview in the digital viewfinder 614, the preview·· in the digital viewfinder 614 is not based on the second camera, in some examples, the displayed viewfinder 614 is based on only the first camera 602 before tlie set of one or more conditions is met. In some examples, the displayed viewfinder 614 is based on both the first camera 602 and the second camera 604 after the set of one or more conditions is met. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device conserves power by only using one camera when both cameras are not needed, but uses two (or more) cameras when the additional cameras provide an advantage (e.g., a visual advantage ).

DK 2016 70627 A1 [øt89[ hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6K, the electronic device 600 applies the simulated optical effect differently to different portions 651 and 652 ofthe preview in the digital viewfinder, in some embodiments, the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh effect) is applied differently to different portions of the preview based on (or as a function of) the distance from the electronic device 600 to objects in the different portions of the preview. For example, a first portion of the preview (e.g,, 652) will appear to have a first degree of blurring and a second portion of the preview (e.g., 651, that represents an object that is further from the electronic device 600 than represented by the fu st portion) will appear to have a second degree of blurring that is more intense than the first degree of blurring. Thus, a preview of a scene with varying depths will have varying blur intensities (e.g,, degrees of blurring) throughout the preview. In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6K, device 600 does not display a graphical indication (e.g,, 675, text including '‘Depth Effect”) that a simulated optical effect (e.g., a simulated bokeh effect) is being applied.

[01901 in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6K, a first portion of tlie preview 651 depicts a first object, wherein the first object is at a first distance from the electronic device 600, a second portion of the preview 652 depicts a second object, and wherein the second object is a second distance (different from die first distance) from the electronic device 600, In some examples, applying the simulated optical effect to the preview 614 includes applying the simulated optical effect to the first portion (e.g., 652) with a first magnitude and applying the simulated optical effect to the second portion (e.g., 651) with a second magnitude that is different front (e.g., greater than) tlie first magnitude. Thus, in some examples, varying intensities of the simulated optical effect are applied to different portions of the preview in the digital viewfinder, which indicates the distance to the objects to a viewer of the preview, [0191| in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG, 6K, applying the simulated optical effect causes a first portion (e g., 651,652) of the digital viewfinder 614 to exhibit an effect, such as a bokeh effect, and a second portion (e.g,, 615, different from die first portion) of the digital viewfinder to not exhibit the effect. In some examples, the simulated optical effect is repeatedly updated based on data from the first camera and the second camera and repeatedly applied to the digital viewfinder. In some embodiments the simulated optical effect is based on which portion of the field of view of the camera has been selected as the point of focus, so when the distance of

DK 2016 70627 A1 an object at the point of focus changes or the user selects a new point of focus, the simulated optical effect changes as weft for example, the simulated optical effect initially causes a first portion of a first preview image displayed in the digital viewfinder 614 to exhibit an effect (and not a second portion) and an updated simulated optical effect causes a third portion (different ironi the first portion) of a second preview image displayed in tire digital viewfinder 614 to exhibit the effect (and not a fourth portion of the second preview image). In some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied to the first portion of preview images displayed in the viewfinder and is not applied to a second portion (different from the first portion) of the preview images displayed in the viewfinder. In some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied to a first portion of a. first preview image displayed in the viewfinder (and not a second portion) and to a third portion {different from the first portion) of a second preview image displayed in the viewfinder (and not a fourth portion). As a result, tire viewfinder exhibits a simulated optical effect. This simulated optical effect is also retained for images captured while the simulated optical effect is applied to the viewfinder.

[0192] In some embodiments, the electronic device 600 generates a depth map based on data received from the first camera 602 and the second camera 604, and the simulated optical effect is based on the depth map. In some examples, the electronic device 600 uses images captured by the first camera. 602 and the second camera 604 to generate the depth map by using a parallax effect where the observed difference in position of an object from two different points of view (e.g., the two cameras) is greater for objects that are closer to the points of view and less for objects that are further from the points of view. In some examples, the depth map includes information indicating distances from the electronic device 600 to various elements (e g., pixels, objects) depicted in the digital viewfinder (e.g., based on the overlapping fields of view of the first camera and the second camera).

[0193] In some embodiments, a condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera 602 (or the second camera 604) exceeds a minimum distance threshold (e.g., 8 feet). Thus, in some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied based on the first camera focusing on a subject that is not too close to the electronic device 600,

DK 2016 70627 A1

Jø 194] hi some embodiments, a condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera 602 (or the second camera 604) does not exceed a maximum distance threshold {e.g., 2.5 meters). Thus, in some examples, the simulated optical effect, is applied based on the first camera 602 focusing on a subject that is not too far from the electronic device 600.

]0195}

In some embodiments, the set of one or more conditions is based on liahtim.

conditions. In some embodiments, a sixth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light (e.g., at the first camera 602, at the second camera 604) does not exceed a maximum light threshold (e.g,, 1000 lux, 2000 lux, 3000 lux, or some other threshold value determined based on the capabilities of the eamera(s ) to function in high light environments). Thus, in some examples, the electronic device 600 encourages the user to improve light conditions by not applying the simulated optical effect when light conditions are not optimal.

|0196| In some embodiments, the determination by the electronic device 600 of whether the set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the first camera, in some examples, data irom the second camera is not used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met, in some examples, data from both the first camera and the second camera are used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met, {0197] in some embodiments, the determination by the electronic device 600 of whether the set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the second camera. in some examples, data from the first camera is not used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met. in some examples, data from both the first camera and the second camera arc used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met.

]0198| In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 6L and 6M, in response to defecting the subject 615 (e.g., within or outside the appropriate distance), the electronic device 600 displays, on the digital viewfinder 614 on the display, one or more visual markers 636 (e.g,, a visual boundary ) that identify the subject. In some examples, the visual characteristic (e.g., color of visual markers, size of visual markers, location of visual markers, and distance between visual markers) of the one or more visual markers is based on whether the set of one or more cond itions

DK 2016 70627 A1 is met. In some examples, the one or more visual markers is a bounding box. In some examples, in accordance with (or in response ro) the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device 600 changes the visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers to indicate to fee user that the set of one or more conditions is met, in some examples, changing the visual indication includes animating the one or more visual markers (e.g., a bounding box) such that the one or more visual markers bounce. Thus, in some examples, the eleetronie device 600 notifies the user as to whether the set of one or more conditions is met based on fee visual characteristic of fee one or more visual markers. In some examples, fee electronic device 600 notifies the user as to whether the set of one or more conditions is met via a visual characteristic of the visual marker.

[0199) In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6N, in accordance with detecting (e.g.. using the first camera 602, fee second camera 604) a plurality of subjects, the electronic device

600 displays a plurality of one or more visual markers 636A - 636D (e.g., visual boundaries) corresponding to the plurality of subjects. Thus, in some examples, fee electronic device 600 notifies the user which subjects are being tracked (and/or considered when determining whether the set of one or more conditions have been met). In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 60, device 600 applies a simulated optical effect (e.g,, a simulated bokeh effect) and a graphical indication (e.g., 675, text including “Depth Effect”), without displaying a visual marker (e.g,, visual marker 636).

)02001 in some embodiments, as illustrated in FSG. 6P, in accordance with the determination that fee set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device o00 changes the a visual characteristic (e.g,, color of visual markers, size of visual markers, location of visual markers, distance between visual markers) of the one or more visual markers (e.g,, visual boundary) before applying the simulated optical effect. For example, in FIG. 6P, the electronic device displays fee one or more virtual markers (e.g,, 636E) with a particular visual characteristic (e.g., a first color, a first location, a first size) and transitions the one or more visual markers (e.g., 636F) to a different visual characteristic (e.g,, a second color, a second location, a second size) before applying the simulated optical effect. In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6Q, in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met (e.g., focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2.5m, light is 4001ux or more; in some

DK 2016 70627 A1 embodiments, the condition Is based on data from one camera sensor (e.g. focal distance data.); in some embodimems, the condition is based on data from both camera sensors), the electronic device applies the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to the preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder 614. As illustrated in FIG. 6Q, as a result, the trees are blurred and fee person is not blurred, |0201} In some embodiments, as illustrated in the transition between f 1GS. 6G to 6J, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met (or not met), the electronic device changes a visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers (e.g., from 636 in FIG. 6G wife, for example, a first color, a first location, a first size to 636 in FIG, 6J wife second color, different frotn the first color), in some examples, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device changes the color or visual texture of the one or more visual markers 636. Thus, in some examples, fee change in the visual characteristic indicates to ihe user that the set of one or more conditions is met. In some examples, in accordance with a subsequent determination feat the set of one or more conditions is no longer met (after fee set of one or more conditions was previously met), fee electronic device changes back fee first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers (e.g., 636 changing the second color back to the iirst color). Thus, in some examples, fee electronic device 600 notifies the user whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

(0202] In some embodiments, in accordance with detecting the subject (e.g., within or outside the appropriate distance), fee electronic device 600 displays, in the digital viewfinder on the display, one or more visual markers (e.g,, a visual boundary') identifying fee subject. In some examples, a second characteristic (e.g., different from the first characteristic) of the one or more visual markers is based on a characteristic (e.g, physical chaiacteristic, size of the subject, distance to the subject, location of the subject) of fee subject. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device 600 indicates to the user which subject is being considered for satisfying the set of one or more conditions. As illustrated in FIG. 6L, the one or more visual markers 636 surrounds a portion of the subject (e.g,₅ from the hips to the head, from the shoulders to the head). When the subject moves further away from the electronic device 600, as illustrated in FIG. 6M, the one or more visual markers 636 are displayed proportionally smaller to compensate for the change in the size of the subject in the digital viewfinder 6.14.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0203] hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 6J, in accordance with applying the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder 614, the electronic device 600 displays, (e.g., in the digital viewfinder 614, outside the digital viewfinder 614) on the display, a graphical indication (e.g., 675, text including “Depth Effect) that the simulated optical effect is being applied to the preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder 614. Thus, a user is quickly able to understand that the simulated optical effect has been applied. In some embodiments, in accordance with not applying the simulated optical effect, the electronic device 600 does not display (e.g, forgoes displaying), on the display, the graphical indication (e.g., text including “Depth Effect”) that fee simulated optical effect is being applied to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device 600 notifies the user that the set. of one or more conditions have been met and.

in some examples, the electronic device 600 notifies the user that tiie set of one or more conditions have not been met.

|O204| In some embodiments, fee electronic device 600 detects a user input requesting to capture an image (e.g., using fee camera application). In response to detecting fee user input requesting to capture the image. In accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, the electronic device 600 captures the image (e.g., based on data from the first camera 602 and not based on data from the second camera 604, based on data from the second camera 604 and not based on data from the first camera 602) without the simulated optical effect. In some examples, the user activates a shutter affordance 617 that is displayed on the display while the set of one or more conditions is not met, and the electronic device 600 captures (e.g., stores in memory) an image using data from fee first camera (or fee second camera) without applying the simulated optical effect to the data from the first camera. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input requesting to capture fee image, in accordance with fee determination drat fee set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device 600 captures the image (e.g., based on data from the first camera 602 and the second camera 604) with the simulated optical effect (e.g.. with the simulated optical effect applied to the image). In some examples, the user activates fee shutter affordance 617 that is displayed on the display while fee set of one or more conditions is met, and the electronic device 600 captures (e.g., stores in memory) an image using data from the first camera (and/or the second camera).

wherein fee simulated optical effect is applied to fee data.

DK 2016 70627 A1

J02Ö5] hi some embodiments, while the electronic device 600 displays the preview in the digital viewfmtler 614 without applying the simulated optical effect, the electauuc device 600 detects a change in the scene in front of one or more of the cameras (e.g., in the field of view of the first camera, due to movement of the first camera, movement of objects/people in the scene, and/or a change in lighting in the scene), hi response to foe electronic device 600 detecting the change in the scene, tn accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has caused the set of one or more conditions to be met (e.g., focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2,5m, light is 400hix or more), foe electronic device 600 applies the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect, simulated color filter, simulated gamma adjustment) to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder 614. in accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has not caused the set of one or more conditions (e.g.. focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2,5m, lisht is 400'lux or mom) to be met, the electronic device 600 maintains display of the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect (e.g,, a bokeh simulated optical effect, simulated color filter, simulated gamma adjustment).

|0206] FIGS. 7A-7B is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing simulated optical effects using an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. Method 700 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., 100, 300,500, 600) with a first camera, a second camera.

and a display. Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations is, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

[0207] At block 702, the electronic· device displays, on foe display (e.g,, 612), a digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) including a preview based on data received from the first camera (e.g,, 602), In some examples, data is displayed in the viewfinder (e.g., 614) without applying a simulated optical effect, such as a bokeh simulated optical effect.

JÖ208] At blocks “04-706, while displaying the digital viewfinder (e.g., 6.14): in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is met (e.g., focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2.5m,. light is 400 lux or more), fhe electronic device (e.g., 600) applies, at block 726, a simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to foe preview displayed in foe digital viewfinder (eg.. 614 at FIG. 61), wherein the simulated

DK 2016 70627 A1 optical effect is based on data received from the first camera (e.g., 602) and the secotid camera (e.g., 604). Thus, the electronic device, hy applying- a simulated optical effect to the preview, informs the user that the set of one or more conditions have been met and informs the user as to what captured images will look like, thereby prompting the user to capture an image (with the applied simulated optical effect), as appropriate, In some embodiments, the one or more conditions are based on data from one camera (e.g. focal distance data), in some .embodiments, the one or more conditions are based on data from both sensors. In some examples, a firstcondition of die set of one or more conditions ts met when a subject (e.g,, 635) is detected within a predetermined distance from the device (e.g. distance from subject (e.g., 615) to the first or second cameras 602, 604).

J0209| Atbiock 732 in FIG. 78, while displaying the digital viewfinder, in accordance with a determination, at block 720, that the set of one or more conditions (e.g,, focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2.5m, light is 4001ux or more) is not met, the electronic device displays, ai block 722, the preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 614 at FIG. 6B) without applying tlie simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect, simulated color filter, simulated gamma adjustment). Thus, the electronic device, by displaying the preview without apply ing the simulated optical effect, informs the user that tlie set of one or more conditions has not been met and informs die user as to what captured images will look like (without the simulated optical effect), thereby prompting the user to take actions such that the one or more conditions will he met (so that the simulated optical effect will be applied). In some embodiments, the set of one or more conditions is based on data from one sensor (e.g. focal distance data). In some embodiments, the set of one or more conditions is based on data from both sensors, (0210] in some embodiments, die simulated optical effect causes a first portion (e.g., 65 i, 652 of FIG. 6K) of the digital viewfinder to exhibit an effect, such as a bokeh effect, and a second portion (e.g., 615 of FIG. 6K, different from the first portion) of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) to not exhibit the effect. In some examples, the simulated optical effect is repeatedly updated based on data from the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) and repeatedly applied to the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614). Thus, the electronic device, by repeatedly updating and applying the simulated optical effect to the digital viewfinder, informs

DK 2016 70627 A1 the user as to what a captured image will look like at any given time (e.g., live or near-livek thereby prompting the user to capture an image (with the applied simulated optical effect), as appropriate. For example, the simulated optical effect initially causes a first portion (e.g., 651, 652) of a first preview image displayed in the viewfinder to exhibit an effect (and not a second portion) and an updated simulated optical effect causes the third portion (different Irani the first portion) of a second preview image displayed in the viewfinder to exhibit, the effect (and not a fourth portion of the second preview image).

[0211} In some embodiments, the simulated optical effect (e.g., as shown in 680) is applied to the first portion (e.g., 651) of preview images displayed in the viewfinder and is not applied to a second portion (e.g., 652) (different from the first portion) of the preview images displayed in the vie wfinder, in some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied to a first portion of a first preview image displayed in the viewfinder (and not a second portion) and to a third portion (different from the first portion) of a second preview image displayed in the viewfinder (and not a fourth portion). As a result, the viewfinder exhibits a simulated bokeh effect. This simulated bokeh effect is also retained for images captured while the simulated optical effect is applied to the viewfinder.

[0212j in some embodiments, the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) have fixed, hut different, focal lengths In some examples, the local length, field of view, and optical magnification properties of the optical system is fixed for each of the cameras, but the fixed focal length is different between the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g,, 604).

[02131 In accordance with some embodiments, prior to applying the simulated optical effect to the preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g.. 614), the preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g..

614 at FIG. 6.B) is not based on the second camera (e.g., 604) (e.g. not based on both cameras),

In some examples, the displayed viewfinder (e.g,, 614 at FIG. 6B) is based on only the first camera (e.g. , 602) before the set of one or more conditions is met. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device, by not basing the preview on the second camera prior to applying the simulated optical effect, conserves battery power offne electronic device. Sn some examples, the

DK 2016 70627 A1 displayed viewfinder (e.g., 614 at FIGS. 61-6K) is based on both the first camera te.g., 602} and the second camera (e.g., 604) after the set of one or more conditions is met.

(0214( la accordance with some embodiments, at block 72S, the simulated optical effect is a simulated hokeh. in some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 6()0) applies the simulated optical effect such that a first part (e.g., 651,652, 680) of foe preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) has a simulated bokeh effect and a second part (e.g., 615) (different from the first part) of foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) does not have a simulated bokeh effect. Thus, in some examples, foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) mimics an optical bokeh effect commonly seen in viewfinders of(and images captured with) SLR cameras, (0215( in accordance with some embodiments, at block 730, the simulated optical effect is applied differently to different portions of the preview in foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 614 of FIG, 6K). In some embodiments, the bokeh effect is applied differently to different portions of the preview based on (or as a function oi) the distance from the electronic device (e.g., 600) to objects in foe different portions of the preview. For example, a first portion (e.g., 651 of FIG, 6K) of the preview will appear to have (or has) a first degree of blurring and a second portion (e.g., 652 of FIG. 6K) of the preview (that represents an object font is further from the electronic device (e.g., 600) than represented by the first portion) will appear to have (or has) a second degree of blurring that is more intense than the first degree of blurring. Thus, in some examples, a preview of a scene with varying depths will have varying blur intensities (e.g., degrees of blurring) throughout the preview, in some examples, while the electronic viewfinder exhibits portions with varying blur intensifies, a picture captured by the electronic device in response to detecting activation of camera shutter affordance 617 will also exhibit corresponding varying blur intensities.

(0216( in accordance with some embodiments, a first portion (e.g., 651 of FIG, 6K) of the preview depicts a first object (e.g., object represented by 651), wherein the first object Is at a first distance from the electronic device (e.g., 600). Additionally, a second portion (e.g., 652 of FIG. 6K.) of the preview depicts a second object (e.g.. object represented by 652), wherein the second object, is a second distance from the electronic device (e.g., 600). in some embodiments, fhe electronic device (e.g., 600) applying foe simulated optical effect to the preview inehides

DK 2016 70627 A1 applying the simulated optical effect to the first portion (e.g,, 651) with a first magnitude and applying the simulated optical effect to the second portion ie.g., 652) with a second magnitude that is different from (e.g., greater than) the first magnitude. Thus, in some examples, varying intensities of the simulated optical effect are applied to different portions of the preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614), which indicates the distance to the objects to a viewer of the preview.

[0217] In accordance with some embodiments, the first camera (e.g., 602) has a first field of view and the. second camera (e.g., 604} has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap. In some examples, the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) are spaced apart so that a parallax between images captured by the camera is used (e.g.. but tire electronic device) to determine depths for objects (e.g., 611A and 61 IB of FIG. 6B) represented by different portions of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614), In some embodiments, the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) are located on a surface of the electronic device (e.g,, 600} and the optical axes of tire cameras are arranged such that they are parallel. In some examples, the first camera (e.g,, 602) and the second camera (e.g,, 604) capture overlapping fields of view, for example, at least 50% o verlapping, at least 90% overlapping, or more. In some examples, the first camera (e.g,, 602) has a wider field of view than the second camera (e.g,, 604), but a lower optical zoom than the second camera (e.g., 604). In some examples, the second camera (e.g., 604) has a wider field of view than the first camera (e.g., 602), but a lower optical zoom than the first camera (e.g., 602).

[0218] In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) generates a depth map based on data received from the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) and the simulated optical effect is based on the depth map. In some examples, the electronic device (e.g,, 600) uses images captured by the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) to generate the depth map by using a parallax effect where the observed difference in position of an object from two different points of view (e.g,, the two cameras) is greater for objects that are closer to the points of view and less for objects that are further from the points of view. In some examples, the depth map includes information indicating distances from the electronic device (e.g., 600) to various elements (e.g., pixels, objects, portions) depicted

DK 2016 70627 A1 in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) i e.g,, based on the overlapping fields of view ofthe first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera te.g.. 604)).

[0219] In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) automatically (e.g., without user intervention, without user input) determines a distance to the subject (e.g.,

615), For example, the electronic device (e.g,, 600) repeatedly (or continuously) tracks the subject (e.g., 615) and determines the distance to the subject (e.g., 615). In some examples, the determination of tlie di stance to the subject is based on a depth map generated based on a parallax effect, in some examples, the determination of the distance to the subject is based on a focus distance of either (or both) the first camera (e.g,, 602) or tlie second camera (e.g,, 604), In some examples, applying tlie simulated optical effect includes applying a blur or bokeh effect to background objects depicted in the electronic viewfinder and not applying the blur or bokeh effect to the subject depicted in the electronic viewfinder, [0220] In accordance with some embodiments, at block 708, a second condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera (e.g,, 602) (or tlie second camera (e.g,, 604)) exceeds a minimum distance threshold (e.g., 8 feet). Thus, in some examples, die electronic device applies the simulated optical effect based on the first camera (e.g,, 602) focusing on a subject (e.g., 615) that is not too close to the electronic device (e.g., [0221] In accordance with some embodiments, at block 710, a third condition ofthe set. of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance ofthe first camera (or the second camera (e.g,, 604)) does not exceed a maximum distance threshold (e.g,, 2,5 meters). Thus, in some examples, the simulated optical effect is applied based on the first camera (e.g,. 602) focusing on a subject, (e.g., 615) that is not too far from the electronic device (e.g,, 600).

]0222[ In accordance with some embodiments, at block 712. a fourth condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when the subject (e.g,, 615) is detected beyond a predetermined minimum distance from the device. Thus, in some examples, die simulated optical effect is applied based on the subject (e.g., 615) that not being too close to the electronic device (e.g,,

600).

DK 2016 70627 A1 (0223] hi accordance with sonic embodiments, at block 714, a fifth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light (e.g., corresponding to tlie darkness 660) (e.g., at the first camera 602, at the second camera 604) exceeds a minimum light threshold (e.g., 100 lux, 200 lux, 300lux, 400 lux, 500 lux, 600 lux, 700 lux, or some other reasonable threshold value determined based on the capabilities of the camera(s) to function in low light environments). Thus, in some examples, the simulated optical effect is appliedbased on the amount of light detected. In some examples, the electronic device (e.g.. 600) encourages the user to improve light conditions by not applying the simulated optical effect when light conditions are not optimal.

[0224| In accordance with some embodiments, at block 716, a sixth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light (e.g., at ihe first camera 602. at the second camera 604) does not exceed a maximum light threshold (e g.. 1000 lux, 2000 lux, 3000 lux, or some other reasonable threshold value determined based on the capabilities of the camera(s) to function in high light environments), lit some examples, fee electronic device (e.g,, 600) encourages the user to improve light conditions by not applying fee simulated optical effect when light conditions are not optimal.

(0225] In accordance with some embodiments, the determination of whether fee set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the first camera (e.g., 602). In some examples, data from the second camera (e.g., 604) is not used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met, which conserves battery power. In some examples, data from both the first camera (e.g,, 602) and the second camera (e.g,, 604) are used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions have been met, which provides more precise metrics.

)0226] hi accordance with some embodiments, the determination of whether fee set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the second camera (e.g,, 604). In some examples.

data from the first camera (e.g. , 602) is not used to determine whether fee set of one or more conditions have been met. In some examples, data from both the first camera (e.g., 602) and the second camera (e.g., 604) are used to determine whether the set of one or more conditions hat been met.

7?

DK 2016 70627 A1 |9227[ hi accordance with some embodiments, at block 724, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions are not met: displaying, on the display (e.g,, 6121 a graphical indication (e.g., 642) of a condition that is not met. In some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 600) does not detect a subject (e.g;, 615 ) (e.g., focus is 10m or more) and instructs the user (e.g., using the graphical indication (e.g,, 642)) to place a subject (e.g,, 615) within an acceptable distance fe.g., within 8 feet and 2.5m).

[9228) hi accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 600) detects a subject (e.g., 615), but the subject (e.g., 615) is too far away (e.g., focus is between 10m and 2.5m), and tire electronic device (e.g,, 600) instructs the user (e.g,, using the graphical indication 642 of FIG. 6G) to move closer to camera (e.g., to within 8 feet), in some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 600) determines an amount of light is too low (e.g., 4001ux or less), and instructs the user (e.g., using the graphical indication 642 of FIG, 6H) to provide more light, in some examples, an affordance is displayed in the viewfinder to allow a user to disable or enable such instructions (e.g;, based on detecting activation of the affordance). In some examples, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions are met, the electronic device (e.g., 600) forgoes displaying, on the display (e.g., 612), the graphical indication (e.g;, 641) instructing the user. Thus, in some examples, foe electronic device (e.g,, 600) does not instruct the user when user action is not helpful for appiying foe simulated optical effect (e.g., 680). Thus, the electronic device, by providing the user with a visual indication (e.g., using graphical indication 642) that a condition has automatically been determined to not have been met, prompts foe user to take actions such that the condition is met.

[02291 In accordance with some embodiments, in response to detecting the subject (e.g., 615) (e.g;, within or outside foe appropriate distance), the electronic device (e.g,, 600) displays, on the digital viewfinder on the display (e.g;, 612), one or more visual markers (e.g., 636) (e.g., a visual boundary) that identify foe subject (e.g., 615). A fi rst visual characteristic (e.g., color of visual markers, size of vi sual markers, location of visual markers, distance between visual markers) of the one or more visual markers (e.g,, 636) is based on whether the set of one or more conditions is met. In some examples, the one or more visual markers (e.g., 636) is a bounding box. In some examples, in accordance with (or in response to) the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device (e.g., 600) changes the visual characteristic of the one or

DK 2016 70627 A1 more visual markers (e.g., 636) to indicate to the user that the set of one or more conditions is tnet. Thus, the electronic device, by changing the visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers 636, informs the user that the electronic device has automatically detected that the set of one or more conditions has been met and prompts the user to capture an image (with tite applied simulated optical effect), as appropriate, [0230} in accordance with some embodiments, changing the visual indication includes animating the one or more visual markets (e.g., 636) (e.g., a bounding box) such that a visual characteristic of the one or more visual markets (e.g,, 636, 636E, and 636F} changes (e.g., repeatedly, a plurality of times), such as repeatedly changing location, size, and/or color. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 600) notifies the user whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

[0231| In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, the electronic device (e.g., 600) changes the first visual characteristic· (e.g,, color of visual markers, size of visual markers, location of visual markers, distance between visual markers) of the one or more visual markers (e.g,, 636) (e.g., visual boundary). Tirus, in some examples, the change in the visual characteristic indicates to the user that the set of one or more conditions is met in some examples, in accordance with a subsequent determ ination that the set of one or more conditions is no longer met (after the set of one or more conditions was previously met), the electronic device (e.g., 600) changes back the first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers (e.g,, 636). Thus, in some examples, the electronic device (e.g,, 600) notifies the user whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

[0232[ In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with detecting the subject (e.g., 615) (e.g,, wtthin or outside the appropriate distance}, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays, in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) on the display (e.g., 612), one or more visual markers (e.g., 636) (e.g,, a visual boundary) identifying the subject (e.g., 615), A second characteristic (e.g,, different from the first characteristic) of the one or more visual markers (e.g., 636) is based on a characteristic (e.g. physical characteristic, size of the subject 615, distance to the subject 615, location of the subject 615). Thus, in some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 600) indicates

DK 2016 70627 A1 to the user which subject te.g,, 615) is being considered for satisfying die set of one or more conditions.

[9233] I« accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with failing io detect die subject (e.g., 615), the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays, in the digital viewfinder te.g., 614} on die display (e.g,, 612), one or more visual markers (e.g., 636 at FIG. 6F) (e.g., a visual boundary) that are centered in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614). In some examples, in accordance with detecting no subjects, the electronic device (e.g., 600) displays in the digital viewfinder te.g., 614) on die display (e.g., 612), one or more visual markers te.g., 636 at FIG. 6F) (e.g,, a visual boundary) dial is centered in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 634), ]9234[ in accordance wife some embodiments, in accordance wife detecting (e.g., using the first camera 602, fee second camera 604) a plurality of subjects, the electronic device (e.g,, 600) displays, in the digital view finder (e.g., 614) on the display ( e.g., 612 ), a plurality of one or more visual markers (e.g., 636A-636D at FIG. 6N) (e.g., visual boundaries) corresponding to the plurality of subjects. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 600) notifies the user which subjects are being tracked (and/or considered when determining whether fee set of one or more conditions have been met).

[9235] In accordance with some embodiments, m accordance with applying the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to fhe preview displayed in the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 614), the electronic device (e.g., 6ÖÖ) displays, (e.g., in the digital viewfinder 614) on tlie display (e.g., 612), a graphical indication (e.g,, 675) (e.g., text including “Depth Effect”) that tlie simulated optical effect is being applied to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder (e.g,. 614), Thus, the electronic device, by pro·', idmg the user with a visual indication (e.g., indication 675) feat, the set of one or more conditions has automatically been determined to have been met, prompts the user to capture an image (wife fee applied simulated optical effect), as appropriate. In accordance with displaying fee preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) without applying the simulated optica! effect (e.g., 680), fhe electronic device (e.g., 600) forgoes displaying, (e.g., in fee digital viewfinder 614) on the display (e.g., 6.12), fee graphical indication (e.g., 675} (e.g., text including “Depth Effect”) that the simulated optical effect is being applied to the pres tew displayed m the digital view finder (e g.. 614). Thus, m some examples, the

DK 2016 70627 A1 electronic device (c.g., 600) notifies the user whether the set of one or more conditions have been met or have not been met. Thus, the electronic device, by providing the user with a visual indication that the set of one or more conditions has automatically been determined fo not have been met (e.g., not displaying indication 675), prompts the user to take actions such that the set of one or more conditions is met before taking a picture or recording a video.

)0236} in accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met (and in response to a user request), the eiectronic device (e.g., 600) captures the image (e.g., based on dared from the first camera 602 and not based on the second camera 604, based on data from the second camera 604 and not based on the first camera 602) without the simulated optical effect. In some examples, the user activates a shutter affordance (e.g., 617) that is displayed on the display (e.g., 612) while the set of one or more conditions is not met, and, in response, the electronic device (e.g,, 600) captures (e.g,, stores in memory) an image using data from the first camera (e.g., 602) (or the second camera (e.g., 604)) without applying the simulated optical effect to the data. Thus the electronic device, by not applying the simulated optical effect to images captured when the set of one or more conditions is not met, informs the user as to the nature of the image data that will be captured and stored, in response to further user input (e.g., an image capture request).

)0237) In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met (and iu response to a user request), the electronic device (e.g., 600) captures the image (e.g., based on dated from the Irrst camera 602 and the second camera 604) with the simulated optical effect (e.g., 680). In some examples, the user activates a shutter affordance that is displayed on the display (e.g.. 612) while the set of one or more conditions is met, and, in response, the electronic device (e g., 600) captures (e.g., stores in memory) an image using data from the first camera (e.g,, 602) (and/or the second camera (e.g., 604)), wherein the simulated optical effect is applied to the data, )0238) In accordance with some embodiments, while the preview is displayed in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 614) without applying the simulated optical effect, the electronic device (e.g., 600) detects a change in the scene in front ofthe cameras (e.g., due to movement of the camera,

DK 2016 70627 A1 movement of objects/people in toe scene, and/or a change in lighting in the scene). In response to detecting the change in the scene; in accordance with a detennination that, the change in the scene has caused the set of one or more conditions to be met (e.g., focus distance is 8 feet or more, Ibens distance is within 8 feet and 2,5m, light is 4001ux or more), the electronic device (e.g,, 600) applies the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect) to the preview displayed in the digt tai viewfinder (e.g.. 614). Thus, the electronic device, by updating the digital viewfinder to apply the simulated optical effect, informs the user that the set of one or more conditions has been met and informs the user as to what a captured image will look (e.g,, live or near-live), thereby prompting the user io capture an image (with the applied simulated optical effect), as appropriate. In accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has not caused the set of one or more conditions {e.g., focus distance is 8 feet or more, focus distance is within 8 feet and 2,5m, light is 400iux or more) to be met, the electronic device (e.g., 600) maintains display of the preview in the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 614) without applying the simulated optical effect (e.g., a bokeh simulated optical effect, simulated color filter, simulated gamma adj usftnent).

[0239| Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method 00 (e.g., FIGS. 7A-7B) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below. For example, methods 900,1100,1300 optionally include one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 700. For example, the electronic viewfinder 614 in method 700 is analogous to the electronic viewfinder in methods 900, 1100, and 1300. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.

|Ö24Ö J FIGS. 8A-8H illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects. The user interfaces hi these figures are used to illustrate processes described below, including the processes in FIG, 9,

102411 FIG. 8A illustrates an electronic device 800 with a first camera 802 and a second camera 804 (e.g., on the rear of the electronic de\ ice 800). in some examples, the first camera

802 and the second camera 804 have fixed, but different, focal lengths, in some examples, the focal length, field of view, and/or optical magnification properties of the optical system is fixed for each of the cameras. In some embodiments, tn addition to having different fixed focal

DK 2016 70627 A1 lengths, the cameras (e.g„ 802, 804) have different fixed fields of view and different fixed optical magnification properties, [0242] In some embodiments, the first camera 802 has a first field of view and the second camera 804 has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and ihe second field of view overlap. In some examples, the first camera 802 and the second camera 804 are spaced apart so that a parallax between images captured by the camera (e.g. 802 and 804) is used to determine depths for objects represented by different portions of the digital viewfinder. In some embodiments, the first camera 802 and foe second camera 804 are located on a surface of the electronic device 800 and the optical axes of foe cameras (e.g, 802 and 804) are arranged such that they are parallel. In some examples, the first camera 802 and the second camera 804 capture overlapping fields of view, for example, at least 50% overlapping, at least 90% overlapping, or more. In some examples, foe first camera 802 lias a wider field of view than the second camera 804, but a lower optical zoom than fhe second camera 804. In some examples, the second camera 804 has a wider field of view than the first camera 802, but a lower optical zoom than foe first camera 802.

{02431 As illustrated in FIG. 8B, the electronic device concurrently displays, on the display 812, a user interface 814 for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera 802 that includes displaying a digital viewfinder 814A with a first magnification (e.g. lx) (e.g., a live or near-live preview image, not based on the second camera), and an affordance (e.g., icon, textual representation indicating foe magnification level) (e.g., 816) for modifying the magnification of photos captured by foe device using one or more of the first 802 and second cameras 804. In some examples, tlie magnification is ix, and the digital viewfinder 814A displays images corresponding to a respective camera without applying a digital zoom, hi some examples, tlie user interface for capturing photos based on data received from foe first camera does not use data received from the second camera for capturing photos.

|0244| The electronic device detects activation (e.g. based on detecting tap gesture 818) of the affordance (e.g. 816). In some examples, detecting activation of the affordance includes detecting a tap gesture 818 at a location on a touch sensitive surface of the electronic device 800 corresponding to a location of the affordance.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0245] As illustrated in FIG. 8C, in response ro detecting activation of the affordance (e.g. SIS), die electronic device 80Öceases to display, on the display 812, the user interface 814 for capturing photos based on data received front the first camera 802, and the electronic device 800 displays, on the display 812, a user interlace 820 for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera 804 that includes displaying a digital viewfinder 820A with a second magnification (e.g., 2x) that is greater than the first magnification. In some examples, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera 804 does not use data received from the first camera 802 for caphiring photos. Thus, in some examples, activation of the affordance 8 38 results in the electronic device replacing the digital viewfinder 814A (based on the first camera 1 with the digital viewfinder 820A (based on the second camera).

[0246] In some embodiments, the digital s iewfinder 820A of the user interface lor capturing photos based on the second camera 804 firlly replaces the digital viewfinder 814A of the user interface for capturing photos based on the first camera 802, ]0247[ In some embodiments, the electronic device provides a zoom control mecbamsm to allow a user to zoom sn and out. .As illustrated m FIG. SD, in some embodiments, the electronic device detects a user input 840 (e.g,, a pinch gesture, a drag gesture on an affordance (e.g., affordance 816), or a swipe input in a region surrounding the affordance) in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). in some examples, the electronic device 800 includes a touchsensitive surface and the user input is received at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). Thus, tire electronic device is said to detect the user input 840 in tire digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). As illustrated in FIG, 8E, fire electronic device, in response to detecting the user input 840, displays (e.g., concurrently with the digital viewfinder), on the display 812, a zoom control 850 (e.g., slider) (e.g,, concurrently with the affordance 816) and, in some embodiments, performs a zoom of die digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A) in accordance with the user input 840. In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. SD, die continuous zoom control 850 is not displayed, on the display 812, prior to detecting the user input 840. Thus, in some embodiments, die electronic device provides the user with an additional mechanism (e.g,, a continuous zoom control) for zooming the digital viewfinder in response to detecting a gesture for zooming.

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0248] hi some embodiments, the electronic device displays the zoom control in response to detecting a pinch gesture. Iu some examples, as illustrated in FIG. 8F, the user input corresponds to a pinch (or de-pinch) gesture (e.g. 860) in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 81.4Ä, 820A). In some examples, also as illustrated in FIG. 8G, electronic device 800, in response to the pinch gesture (e.g., 860), performs a zoom of the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 814A, 820A) and also displays continuous zoom control 850.

[0249] In some embodiments, the electronic device 800 displays the zoom control 850 in response to detecting a drag gesture, hi some, examples, the user input corresponds to a drag gesture in the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 83 4A, 820A), in some examples, the electronic device 800 includes a touch-sensitive surface, and wherein the user input is a drag gesture at a location on die touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the affordanee. Thus, in some examples, the electronic device 800 detects user input corresponding to dragging the affordanee (e.g., 816, the 1 x/2x indicator), and in response, displays the zoom control (e.g., concurrently with the affordanee 816), [0250] In some embodiments, the electronic dev ice 800 displays the zoom control in response to detecting a swipe gesture. In some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a swipe gesture in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). In some examples, the electronic device includes a touch-sensitive surface, and wherein the user input is a swipe gesture at a location on die touch-sensitive surface corresponding to die digital viewfinder. In some examples, the electronic device detects user input-corresponding to a swipe gesture on the digital viewfinder, and hi response, displays the zoom control (e.g,, concurrently with the affordanee 816), [0251] hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. SH, the zoom control 850 is a slider. In some embodiments, the zoom control 850 includes a plural ity of positions corresponding to a plurality of magnification levels (e.g, 862 and 864).

[0252] In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 8H, the zoom control 850 includes a plurality of locations corresponding to a plurality of magnification levels (e.g., 862 and 864), and wherein a first location 862 of the plurality of locations corresponds to a first optical magnification level {e.g., based on a first, camera without any digital zoom) and a second location

DK 2016 70627 A1

864 of the plurality of locations corresponds to a second optical magnification level that is different from the first optical magnification level (e.g.. based on a second camera without any digital zoom).

[02531 In some embodiments, the zoom control acts as a joystick-like control. In some examples, affordance 816 acts as a joystick-like control In some examples, tlie electronic device 800 detects a gesture corresponding to the zoom control (e.g., at a location on a touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the zoom control) or the affordance 816 (e.g,, at a location on a touchsensitive surface corresponding to the affordance 816), the gesture having a direction and a length. The electronic device 800 in response to detecting the gesture and in accordance with the direction being a first direction, performs a zoom-out of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A,

820A) (e.g., with increasing speed) at a speed based on the magnitude ofthe gesture (e.g., a distance moved from particular location on the touch-sensitive surface, or a distance moved from an ini tial point of contact on the touch-sensiti ve surface). The electronic device 800, in response to detecting foe gesture and in accordance with the direction being a second direction different from the first direction, performs a zoom-in of the digital viewfinder (e.g., with increasing speed) at a speed based on the magnitude of tlie gesture. In some embodiments, the zoom control acts as a joystick-like control wherein detecting a drag gesture in one direction zooms out the viewfinder with increasing speed based on a magnitude of tlie gesture and wherein dragging in another direction (e.g., opposite to the first direction) zooms in the viewfinder with increasing speed based on a magnitude of the gesture.

[0254] In some embodiments, the affordance 816 for modifying tlie magnification is displayed in accordance with a determination that the electronic device includes a plurality of cameras (e.g., 802 and 804) with overlapping fields of view. In some examples, the cameras (e.g,, 802 and 804) are arranged such that the cameras have parallel optical axes or substantially parallel optical axes. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that tlie electronic device does not include a plurality of cameras with overlapping fields of view, the electronic device forgoes displaying the affordance 816 for modifying the magnification, |0255 | in some embodiments, the electronic device 800 detects a second activation of the affordance 8.16 for modifying the magnification. In some examples, detecting activation ofthe

S3

DK 2016 70627 A1 affordance includes detecting a tap gesture at & location on a touch sensitive surface corresponding to a location of the attendance. The electronic device, in response to detecting the second activation of the affordance 816 for modifying the magnification ceases to display, on the display 812, the user interface 820 for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera 802, and fee electronic device displays, on fhe display 812, fhe user interface 814 for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera 802 that includes displaying fhe digital viewfinder 814.Ä with the first magnification.

{0256} In some embodiments, fee zoom control 850 lades out (e.g., visually, on ihe display) in response to device 800 detecting an input lift-off signal associated wife the user input in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). In some embodiments, the displayed affordance 816 for modifying the magnification does not fade out in response detecting the input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 814A, 820A). ln some examples, fhe electronic device determines that the user input has ended, such as by detecting a lift-off of a touch performed on a touch-sensitive surface, and in response fades out the display of fee zoom control 850, {0257{ in some embodiments, displaying (e.g., concurrently with the digital viewfinder), on the display, the zoom control 850 includes replacing display of the affordance 836 for modifying the magnification witli display of the zoom control.

[0258] FIG. 9A is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., 100, 300, 500,600, 800) with a first camera, a second camera, and a display. Some operations in method 900 are, optionally, combined, fhe order of some operations is, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

At blocks 902-906, the electronic· device (e.g., 800)concurrently displays, on the display (e.g., 812): a user interface (e.g., 814) for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera (e.g,, 802) feat includes displaying a digital viewfinder (e.g,, 814A) witli a first magnification (e.g., a live or near-live preview image, not based on the second camera (e.g., 804)). The electronic device (e.g., 800) forther displays an affordance (e.g., 816) for modifying magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second

DK 2016 70627 A1 cameras (e.g. 802 and 804) (e.g., icon, textual representation indicating the magnification level), in some examples, the magnification is lx, and the digital viewfinder fe.g., 814A} displays images corresponding to a respective camera without digital zoom.

(02601 At block 908, the electronic device (e.g,, 800) detects activation of the affordance (e.g,, 816), in some examples, detecting activation of the affordance (e.g,, 816) includes detecting a tap gesture (e.g., 818) at a location on a touch sensitive surface corresponding to a location of the affordance (e.g., 816).

[02611 At block 910. in response to detecting activation of the affordance (e.g., 816): the electronic device (e.g,, 800) ceases, at block 912, to display, on the display (e.g,, 812), the user interface (e.g., 814) for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera (e.g., 802), and, at block 914, the electronic device (e.g,, 800) displays, on the display (e.g,, 812), a user interface (e.g., 820) for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera (e.g., 804) that includes displaying a digital viewfinder (e.g., 82ÖA) with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification. Thus, in some examples, by transitioning user interfaces (of the first camera to the second camera) in response to detecting activation of the affordance (e.g,, 816), the electronic device informs the user of the internal state of the electronic device (e.g., which camera will be used when a picture is taken) and also informs a user of what a captured image will look like (e.g., magnification, qualify, field of view) before the image is captured. In some examples, the user interface (e.g., 814) for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera (e.g., 802) does not use data received from the second camera (e.g., 804) for capturing photos.

[02621 In accordance with some embodiments, the user interface (e.g., 820) for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera (e.g.. 804) does not use data received from the first camera (e.g., 802) for capturing photos. In some examples, the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 820A) of the user interface (e.g,, 820) for capturing photos based on the second camera (e.g., 804) fully replaces the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814 A) of the user interface (e.g:., 814) for capturing photos based on the first camera (e.g., 802). In some examples, the first camera (e.g„ 802) and the second camera (e.g., 804) have fixed, but different, focal lengths. In some examples, the focal length, field of view, and optical zoom properties of the optical system is

DK 2016 70627 A1 fixed for each of the cameras, but the fixed focal length is different between the first camera (e.g., 802} and the second camera (e.g., 804).

[9263] In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g·, 800) detects a user rnput (e.g. 818, 840, 860) in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A) (e.g., a tap gesture, a pinch gesture, a drag gesture of an affordance 816, or a swipe input in a region surrounding the affordance). In response to detecting fee user input: the electronic device (e.g., 800) displays (e.g,, concurrently with fee digital viewfinder), on fee display (e.g., 812), a zoom control (e.g., 850 s (e.g., a slider). Thus, by displaying a zoom control (e.g., 850) in response to the user input, the electronic device provides the user with an additional (e.g., more precise) mechanism (e.g,, a continuous zoom control) for zooming the digital viewfinder. In some embodiments, fee zoom control (e.g., 850) is not displayed, on the display (e.g,, 812 at FIG. 8B-8D), prior to detecting fee user input, in some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g,, 800) performs a zoom of fee digital viewfinder (e.g., 8I4A, 820A) in accordance wife the user input (e.g. 818, 840, 860).

Thus, in some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 800) provides the user wife an additional mechanism (e.g,, the zoom control 850) for zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A).

In some examples, fee electronic device (e.g,, 800) includes a touch-sensitive surface and the user input (e.g. 818,840, 860) Is received at a location on fee touch-sensitive surface corresponding' to the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 814 A, 820A), Thus, fee electronic device (e.g., 800) is said to detect the user input in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 8.14A» 820Ä).

(9264[ in accordance with some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a pinch gesture (e.g, 860) In fee digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 82ÖA). In some examples, electronic device (e.g,, 800) includes a touch-sensitive surface, and the user input is a pinch gesture (e.g,, 860) at a location on fee touch-sensitive surface corresponding to fee digital viewfinder (e,g„ 814Ä,

82ÖA).

[9265] hi accordance wi in the digital viewfinder (e.g th some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a drag gesture .., 814A, 820A). In some examples., the electronic device (e.g., 800) sensitive surface corresponding to the affordance (e.g., 816), In some examples, the electronic device (e g.. 800) detects user input corresponding to dragging fee affordance (e.g.. 816) (e.g..

includes a touch-sensitive surface.

and the user inout is a dran. gesture at a location on the touch84

DK 2016 70627 A1 the lx/2x indicator), and In response, the electronic device (e.g,, 800) displays the zoom control (e.g,, 850). Thus, by displaying a zoom control (e.g., 850} in response io the user input, the electronic device provides the user with an additional (e.g., more precise) mechanism (e.g., a continuous zoom control) for zooming the digital viewfinder, [0266] In accordance with some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a swipe gesture in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820Ä). In some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 800) includes a touch-sensitive surface, and wherein the user input is a swipe gesture at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A. 820A). In some examples, the electronic device (e.g,, 800) detects user input corresponding to a swipe gesture on the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 814A, 820A), and in response, displays the zoom control (e.g., 850).

[0267] In accordance with some embodiments, the zoom control (e.g,, 850) includes a zoom indicator affordance (e.g., as described with reference to 1040 of FIGS. 10A-I0T). In some examples, the zoom control (e.g., 850) includes a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of magnification level s, [0268] In accordance with some embodiments, the zoom control (e.g., 850) includes a plurality of locations (e.g., 862 and 864) corresponding to a plurality of magnification levels, and wherein a first location (e.g., 862) o f the plurality of locations corresponds to a first optical magnification level (e.g., based on a first camera (e.g., 802) without any digital zoom) and a second location (e.g., 864) of the plurality of locations (e.g., 862 and 864) corresponds to a second optical magnification level that is different from the first optical magnification level (e.g., based on a second camera (e.g., 804) without any digital zoom. Thus, by providing a zoom control that includes positions corresponding to two optical levels (e.g., of the two respective cameras), the electronic device provides an efficient user-machine interface for transitioning between the two cameras.

[0269] In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 800) detects a gesture (e.g, 818, 840, 860) corresponding to the zoom control (e.g., 850) (e.g., at a location on a touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the zoom control (e.g,, 850)), the gesture having a direction and a length. In response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom control (e.g., 850) and in accordance with the direction being a first direction, the electronic device (e.g.,

DK 2016 70627 A1

800) performs a zoom-out of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814 A, 820A) (e.g., with increasing speed) at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture (e.g., a distance tnosed from particular location on the touch-sensitive surface, or a distance moved front an initial point of contact on the touch-sensitive surface). In response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom controi (e.g., 850) and in accordance with the direction being a second direction different from the first direction, the electronic device (e.g.. 80(f) performs a zoom-in of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 82ÖA) (e.g., with increasing speed) at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture. In some embodiments, the zoom control (e.g,, 850) acts as a joystick-like controi wherein detecting a drag gesture in one direction zooms out the viewfinder with increasing speed based on a magnitude of the gesture and wherein dragging in another direction (e.g.. opposite to the first direction) zooms in the viewfinder (e.g., 814A. S2OA) with increasing speed based on a magnitude of the gesture. Thus, by performing zoom operations with varying speeds based on the magnitudes of the gestures, the electronic device optimizes the user-machine interface by reducing the number of user inputs (e.g., to a single gesture) that the user is required to provide in order to instruct the electronic device to both perform a zoom operation as well as the speed with which the zoom operation should be performed.

|0270J In accordance with some embodiments, the afiordance (e.g,, 816) for modifying the magnification is displayed in accordance with a determination that the electronic device (e.g., 800) includes a plurality of cameras with overlapping fields of view. In some examples, the cameras are arranged such that the cameras have parallel optical axes, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that the electronic device (e.g., 800) does not include a plurality of cameras with overlapping fields of view, the electronic device forgoes displaying the affordance (e.g,, 816).

|0271j In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 800) detects a second activation of the affordance (e.g., 816) for modifying the magnification. In some examples, detecting activation of the affordance (e.g., 816) includes detecting a tap gesture (e.g., 818) at a location on a touch sensitive surface corresponding to a location of the affordance (e.g., 816). In response to detecting the second activation of the affordance (e.g,, 816) for modifying the magnification: the electronic device (e.g., 800) ceases to display, on the display (e.g., 812), the user interface (e.g., 820) for capturing photos based, on data received irom the second camera

DK 2016 70627 A1 (e.g., 804k and the electronic device (e.g., 800) displays, on the display (e.g., 812), the user interface (e.g,, 814} for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera {e.g., 802) that includes displaying the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A) with the first magnification. Thus, in some examples, by transitioning user interfaces (of the second camera to the first camera) in response to detecting the second activation of the affordance (e.g., 816), the electronic device informs the user of the internal state of the elec tronic device (e.g., which camera w ill be used when a picture is taken) and also informs the user of what a captured image will look like (e.g., magnification, quality, field of view) before the image is captured.

{0272] In accordance with some embodiments, the displayed zoom control (e.g,, 850} fades out in response to detecting an input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 8Ϊ4Α, 820A) and wherein the displayed affordance (e.g,, 816) for modifying the magnification does not fade out in response detecting the input lift-oif signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 814A, 820A). In some examples, the electronic device (e.g,, 800} determines that the user input has ended, such as by detecting a lift-off of a touch performed on a touch-sensitive surface, and in response, the electronic device (e.g., 800) fades out the display of the zoom control (e.g.. 850).

[0273] In accordance with some embodiments, displaying (e.g,, concurrently with the digital viewfinder 814A, 820A), on the display (e.g., 812) the zoom control (e.g.. 850) includes replacing display of the affordance (e.g., 816) for modifying the magnification with display of the zoom control (e.g,, 850).

{0274] Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method 900 (e.g., FIG. 9) are also applicable in an analogous manner to the methods described below, f or example, methods 700, 1100, 1300 optionally include one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 900. For example, the electronic viewfinder in method 900 is analogous to foe electronic viewfinder in methods 700,1100, and 1300. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.

{0275] FIGS. 10A-10T illustrate exemplary devices and user interfaces for zooming a digital viewfinder, in accordance with some embodiments, ihe user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate processes described below, including the processes in FIG, 15.

DK 2016 70627 A1

JÖ276] FIG, i OA illustrates an exemplary electronic device i 000, In some embodiments, the electronic device 1000 includes a first camera 1002 and a second camera 1004 (e.g., on the rear of the electronic device 1000). In some examples, the first camera 1002 and the second camera 1004 have fixed, hut different, focal lengths. In some examples, foe focal length, field of view, and/or optical magnification properties of the optical system is fixed for each of foe cameras, in some embodiments, in addition to having different fixed focal lengths, the cameras (e.g,, 1002, 1004) have different fixed fields of view and different fixed optical magnification properties.

|0277| As illustrated in FIG. 10B, the electronic device 1000 displays, on the display, a digital viewfinder 1014 based on data received from foe one or more cameras (e.g., a live or near-live preview image from either camera). In some examples, the digital viewfinder 1014 displays data based only one of foe first and second cameras (e.g. 1002 and 1004).

]0278| As illustrated in FIGS. 10C-10H, as user performs a drag gesture on a zoom indicator affordance 1040 to change the magnification of foe digital viewfinder 1014. The zoom indicator affordance 1040 progresses with the gesture, hi contrast, the magnification of the digital viewfinder 1014 progresses at a different rate, initially lagging behind the gesture and later catching up to the gesture. As illustrated in FIGS. lOC-lOH, while displaying the digital viewfinder 1014, the electronic device 1000 detects a gesture 1010 (e.g., a drag gesture on a touch-sensitive surface, a drag gesture at a location corresponding to a zoom control 1030) that progresses at a gesture rate 1016, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder 1014 from a first magnification level (e.g., lx, as illustrated in FIG. 10C, corresponding to location 1022 on fhe zoom control 1030) to a third magnification level (e.g,, lOx, as illustrated in FIG, 10H, corresponding to location 1026 on die zoom control 1030). In response to detecting the gesture, the electronic device 1000 zooms the digital viewfinder 1014 from the first magnification level (e.g,, lx, as illustrated in FIG, IOC) to a second magnification level (e.g., 3x, as illustrated in FIG. I OB, corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 1030) and from the second magnification level (e.g., 3x, as illustrated in FIG. 10E, corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 1030) to a third magnification level (e.g., lOx, as illustrated in FIG. 10H, corresponding to location .1026 on the zoom control 1030), wherein during a first portion of foe gesture (e.g., foe portion of the gesture as it progress in FIGS. I OC to 1ÖD), the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder at a fust rate (e.g., an

SS

DK 2016 70627 A1 average rate) that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing, and daring a second portion of the gesture (e.g., the portion of the gesture a» n progresses in FIGS. I OD through I OH ) that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder at a second rate (e.g., an average rate) that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

(0279( In some examples, the electronic device receives a request to record a video (e.g., detecting a tap gesture at a location corresponding to the camera shutter affordance 101) prior to detecting the gesture and, in response, the to the request to record the video electronic device records a video to memory, the video recording beginning before the gesture is detected and ending after the gesture ends. In some examples, the recorded video includes zooming that corresponds to the zooming performed in fhe digital viewfinder in response to the gesture. In some examples, representations of the images displayed in die viewfinder are stored in memory as part of the video, including the zooming performed. In some examples, the size of the digital viewfinder on the display is maintained while the digital viewfinder is zoomed (e.g., the content within the digital viewfinder is zoomed), (0280( in some embodiments, as described in detail below and as illustrated in FIGS. 10C10H: (I) during a first portion of the gesture; (a) the gesture progresses from a location 1022 corresponding to lx magnification to a location 1024 corresponding 3x magnification and (h) the magnification level of the digital viewfinder changes from lx magnification to 2x magnification; (2) during a second portion of the gesture; (a) fhe gesture progresses from the location 1024 corresponding to 3x magnification to a location 1026 corresponding lOx magnification and (b) the magnification level of tire digital viewfinder changes from 2x magnification to lOx magnification. Thus, (I) during die first portion of the gesture the magnification level lags behind die gesture and (2) during the second portion of the gesture the magnification level catches up to the gesture. In some embodiments, the gradual zooming is performed even when an input that corresponds to a request to switch between discrete zoom levels is received (e.g,, a tap on a l x/2x button as described above with respect to method 800).

10281( In some embodiments, during foe first portion of the gesture the magnification le vel lags behind the gesture. In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 1.0C-10D, during the first

DK 2016 70627 A1 portion of fee gesture, the gesture progresses from a first state (e.g., location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) to a second state (e.g,, location 1024 on fee zoom control 1030), wherein tlie first state corresponds to fee first magnification level (e.g,, lx, as illustrated in FIG. 10C, corresponding to location 1022 on fee zoom control 1030) (optionally, the first state of the gesture is a state at which the contact is detected at a location feat corresponds to a portion of a zoom control 1030 that corresponds to the first magnification level) and the second state corresponds to the second magnification level (e.g., 3.x, as illustrated in FIG. 10E, corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 1030} that is higher than the first magnification level (e.g., if the gesture is maintained a t the second state for at least a predetermined period of time the magnification level will come to rest at the second magnification level, optionally, fee second state of the gesture is a state at which the contact is detected at a location feat corresponds to a portion of the zoom control (e.g,, 1030) feat corresponds to the second magnification level), and the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level (e.g., lx, as illustrated in FIG. IOC, corresponding to location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) to an intermediate magnification level (e.g., 2x. as illustrated in FIG. l.OD, corresponding to location 1028 on the zoom control 1030} that is higher fee first magnification level (e.g., ix. as Illustrated in FIG. 10C. corresponding to location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) and lower than the second magnification level (e.g,, 3x, as illustrated in FIG. 10E_S corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 1030) (e.g., the magnification level lags behind the gesture).

|0282} In some embodiments, during fee second portion of the gesture the magnification level catches up io the gesture. In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 10D-- 1011, during fee second portion of fee gesture, the gesture progresses from fee second state (e.g., location 1024 on the zoom control 1030) to a third state (e.g., location 1026 on fee zoom control 1030), wherein fee third state corresponds to a third magnification level (e.g., I Ox, as illustrated in FIG, 1011, corresponding to location 1026 on the zoom control 1030) that is higher than fee second magnification level (e.g., 3x, as illustrated in F1.G. 10E, corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 1030) and the intermediate magnification level (e.g., 2x, as illustrated in FIG, 10D, corresponding to location 1028 on the zoom control 1030) (e.g., if the gesture is maintained at the second state for at least a predetermined period of time the magnification level will come to rest at the second magnification level optionally, the third state of the gesture ts a state at which the contact is detected at a location that corresponds to a portion of fee zoom control (e.g., 1030)

DK 2016 70627 A1 that corresponds to the third magnification level) and the electronic device 200ms the digital viewfinder from the intermediate magnification level (e.g,, 2x, as illustrated in FIG, BID. corresponding to location 1028 on the zoom control .1030) that is lower than the second magnification level (e,g„ 3x, as illustrated in FIG. 10E, corresponding to location 1024 on the zoom control 3030) to the third magnification level (e.g., 10x, as illustrated in FIG. 10H, corresponding to location 1026 on the zoom control 1030). Thus, in some embodiments, during the second portion of the gesture, the magnification level catches up to the gesture, changing from the intermediate magnification level to foe third magnification level, wherein the intermediate magnification level is lower than foe second magnification level, ]02831 In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 10C-10F, the first portion of the gesture (e.g., as illustrated tn FIGS. BIC-10D) includes movement of one or more contacts (e.g., 1010} on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a drag input or de-pinch input on a touch-sensitive display) and the rate at which the first portion ofthe gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement (e.g., 1016) of the one or more contacts (e.g„ 1010), The second portion of foe gesture includes continued movement of the one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g,, a. continuation of the drag input, as illustrated in FIGS. 10D-10F, or the de-pinch input the touchsensitive display) and the rate at which the second portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement (e.g., 1016) ofthe one or more contacts (e.g., 1010), During foe second portion of the gesture, the movement of the one or more contacts ceases (e.g,, as illustrated in FIGS. 10G-10H) while the one or more contacts (e.g., 1010) continue to be detected on the touch-sensitive surface and, the electronic device 1000 continues to zoom the digital viewfinder .1014 after the movement of foe one or more contacts (e.g., 1010) has ceased. In some embodiments, the zooming lags behind the movement of the contacts for at least a portion of the gesture and then catches up when foe movement of the contacts stops, [0284] In some embodiments, continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after the movement of the one or more contacts (e.g,, 1010) has ceased includes gradually decreasing the rate at which the magnification level is increasing. In some embodiments, the electronic device decreases the rate at which the zoom Is increasing as the current magnification level approaches the third magnification level (e.g., lOx, as illustrated in FIG. IØH) that corresponds to the

DK 2016 70627 A1 position (e.g., corresponding to location i026 on the zoom control 1030 } at which the one or more contacts stopped moving.

{0285( In some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing the rate at which the magnification level increases when the contact (e.g,, 1010) moves away from a starting position (e.g., corresponding to location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the magnification level eases into a respective rate of changing the magnification level then eases out of the rate of changing the magnification level to provide a smoother zooming effect, {0286} in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 1 OB-101 the electronic device 1000 concurrently displays, on the display 1012, with the digital viewfinder 1014, a zoom control 1030 (e.g., an adjustable zoom control such as a zoom slider), wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control 1030 correspond to a plurality of magnification levels (e.g. l x, 1,1 x,

1,2x, 1,3x, etc.), and a zoom indicator affordance 1040 (e,g„ a draggable circle or square on the zoom slider). In response to detecting the gesture (e.g., contact 1010), the electronic device 100 updates display of the zoom indicator affordance 1040 to transition, at the gesture rate 1016, from a first position (e.g,, location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) of the plurality of positions to a second position (e.g., location 1026 on the zoom control 1030) of the plurality of positions, wherein the first position corresponds to the first magnification level (e.g,, lx, as illustrated in FIG, IOC, corresponding to location 1022 on the zoom control 1030) of the plurality of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to the third magnification level (e.g,, lOx, as illustrated in FIG, 10H, corresponding to location 1026 on the zoom control 1030) of the plurality of magnification levels. Thus, in some embodiments, the electronic device enables the user to perform the zoom operation by dragging the zoom indicator affordance 1040 along the zoom control 1030.

(0287} In some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level (e g., lx. as illustrated in FIG. IOC, corresponding to location 1022 on (he zoom control

1030) to the third magnification level (e.g,, 10x, as illustrated in FIG, I OH, corresponding to location 1026 on thezoo.ru control 1030) includes zooming the digital viewfinder while

DK 2016 70627 A1 smoothing the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which the gesture progresses, by limiting the rate of the zoom ot the rate of change of the rate offne zoom. Thus, the electronic device provides a more visually pleasing (e.g,, less disorienting) zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory (e.g., where the electronic device is performing a video recording operation while the gesture is detected), in some examples, the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder while smoothing the rate at which the zoom occurs by limiting the rate of the zoom (e.g., a max rate of zoom }. In some examples, the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder while smoothing the rate at which the zoom occurs by limiting the rate of change of the rate of the zoom, in some examples, the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder while smoothing the rate at which the zoom occurs by limiting both the rate of the zoom and the rate of change of the rate of the zoom, [02881 In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 10L-1 GO during a third portion of the gesture that occurs before the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) at a thud rate that corresponds to the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing (during the third portion of the gesture). Thus, when the gesture is below a threshold gesture rate, the zoom rate matches tire rate gesture, allowing the user to directly control the zoom speed for videos recorded to memory.

[0289[ in some embodiments, at a first time during the first portion of the gesture, the electronic device 1000 zooms the digital viewfinder 1014 at the first rate while a first gesture rate of the gesture exceeds a threshold gesture rate, in some examples, this occurs during the first portion of the gesture, where the gesture is fast and pulling away from the zoom, assuming the first rate is a maximum zoom speed and that the threshold gesture is the gesture speed that corresponds to the first rate. In some embodiments, at a second time during the second portion of the gesture, fite electronic device 1000 zooms the digital vi ewfinder 1014 at the fi rst rate while a second gesture rate of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate. For example, towards end of the second portion of the gesture, the gesture has slowed or stopped and the zoom is catching up at the maximum zoom speed. Thus, in some examples, the digital viewfinder .1014 reaches (and tops out at) a maximum zoom rate, which helps to smooth out zooms (e.g., that occur while a video is being recorded). Thus, the electronic device provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memoty.

DK 2016 70627 A1 )0290} hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. I OP, subsequent to the electron ic device 1000 detecting the gesture and subsequent, to zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level, the electronic device 1000 detects a tap gesture 1080 (e.g., a touch gesture) at a location (e.g., 1082) corresponding to a third position of the plurality of positions (e.g., at a location on a touch-sensitive display that corresponds to the third position), wherein the third position corresponds to a fourth magnification level (e.g., 2x, corresponding to location 1082 on the zoom control) of the plurality' of magnification levels, in response to detecting the tap gesture, the electronic device zooms foe digital viewfinder 1014 from the third magnification level to the fourth magnification level (e.g., 2x), as illustrated in FIG. I OP. In some examples, the zooming is limited to a maximum zoom rate. In some examples, the rate of change ofthe zoom rate is limited to a maximum zoom-change rate. Thus, the electronic device provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory hy limiting zooms that are not smooth.

)02911 In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS, 10C-10H in response to detecting foe gesture, the electronic device displays, on the display, a graphical magnification level indicator 1090 (e.g., including text indicating foe current magnification level) that indicates a current magnification level. Thus, the electronic device informs the user as to foe current magnification level.

)0292) In some embodiments, after the graphical magnification level indictor 1090 has been displayed for a predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, ceasing to display, on the dispiay, the graphical magnification level indictor. In some examples, foe graphical magnification level indicator is displayed while zooming foe digital viewfinder and for a predetermined period of time after zooming the digital viewfinder. In some examples, the graphical zoom indicator fades out after the second predetermined amount of time has elapsed, )0.293) In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 10J-10K, after the zoom control 1030 has; been displayed tor a second predetermined period of time after zooming of foe digital viewfinder has ceased, the electronic device 1000 eeases to display, on the display, the zoom control 1030. In some examples, the zoom control 1030 is only displayed while zooming the digital viewfinder 1014 and for a predetermined period of time after zooming the digital

DK 2016 70627 A1 viewfinder 1014. In some examples, foe zoom control lades out after the second predetermined amount of time has elapsed.

[0294] In some embodiments, fhe electronic device 1000 displays (e.g,, persistently), on foe display, fhe zoom control 1030 while displaying the digital viewfinder 1014 (e.g. zoom control is persistent). Thus, the zoom control 1030 is available to the user without foe need for the user to provide additional input.

|0295] In some embodiments, the electronic device detects a pinch gesture on the digital viewfinder 1014. For example, the electronic device includes a touch-sensitive surface and fhe pinch gesture is detected at a location corresponding to the digital viewfinder. In response to detecting the pinch gesture, fhe electronic device zooms fhe digital viewfinder at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout foe pinch gesture (e.g,, without limiting the rate of change of foe zoom to smooth the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which the gesture progresses). Thus, when foe electronic device detects a pinch gesture corresponding to a zoom operation, the electronic device does not smooth the rate of fhe zoom. Thus, zooming that results from detecting the pinching gesture modifies the magnification level with direct manipulation such that changes in the magnification level start when foe contacts start moving and end when the contacts stop moving.

|Ö2961 In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. 10Q and 1OR, displaying the zoom control 1030 includes displaying the zoom control vertically on the display. In some examples, foe zoom control is a straight line. Thus, the zoom control 1030 is displayed at an orientation that is convenient for the user to access.

{0297| in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIGS. IOP and IOS, displaying the zoom eminol 1030 include« d'splaxntg tlie zoom contiol hon/omalh on tbedisplav In seme examples, the zoom control is a straight, line. Thus, foe zoom control is displayed at an orientation that is convenient for the user to access.

|0298| in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. SOT the plurality of positions corresponding to foe plurality of magnification levels are positioned along the zoom control 1092 such that the magnification le vels are not distributed linearly. In some embodiments, foe

DK 2016 70627 A1 plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of magnification levels are positioned along the zoom control 1090 such that the magnification levels are distributed linearly. The examples illustrated in FIG. 10T are exemplary and the hashes and magnification levels are provided for explanatory purposes.

[0299] In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. I0T, the distance along foe zoom control between a location 1094 corresponding to the lowest magnification level (e.g., lx magnification) and a location 1098 corresponding to a magnification level that is double the lowest magnification level (e.g., 2x magnification) extends (e.g,, 1096) more than 25% of a total distance (length) of foe zoom control and less than 45% of foe total distance (length) of foe zoom control (e.g., 30% of the total distance of the zoom control).

[030Ö] In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. IØT, locations (e.g,, 1093,3095, 1094, 1098) along the zoom control (e.g., 1090,1092) corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished (e.g., snap points) from locations (e.g... 1097, 1099) along the zoom control corresponding to non-optical magnification levels. In some examples, the zoom control (e.g., 1090,1092) includes markers for the l x and 2x magnification levels, which correspond to optical zooms of a first camera and a second camera of the electronic device.

[030.1] In some embodiments, taping at a location that corresponds to an optical magnification level transitions the display ironi the current magnification level to the optical magnification level. In some embodiments, the third position of the plurality of positions corresponds to an optical magnification level. In some embodiments, a smoothed zooming effect, as described above, is used with other zoom controls, such as the zoom controls described with reference to method 900 and method 1300.

[0302] FIG 11 is a fiow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 3100 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 800, 1000) with a first camera, a second camera, and a display. Some operations in method 900 are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are, optionally, omitted.

DK 2016 70627 A1

At block 1102. the electronic des ice (e.g., 1000) displays, on the display (e.g., 1012); a digital viewfinder (e.g., 1614} based on data received from the one or more cameras (e.g..

1002, 1004) (e.g., a live or near-live preview image from either sensor). In some examples, the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) displays data based only one of the first and second cameras (e.g,, 1002, 1004).

|031M} At block 1104, while displaying the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014), the electronic device (e.g., 1000) detects a gesture (e.g., 1010), a drag gesture co a touch-sensitive surface) that progresses at a gesture rate (e.g., 1016). the gesture (e.g., 1010} corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) from a first magnification level to a third magnification level.

{0305] At block 1106, in response io detecting the gesture (e.g., 1010), fite electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 1014) from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including: at block 1108, during a first portion of the gesture, the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) at a first rate (e.g., an average rate) that is slower than the gesture rate (e.g., 1016) at which the gesture is progressing, and at block 1112 during a second portion of fhe gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) at a second rate (e.g., an average rate) feat is fester than the gesture rate (e,g„ 1016) at which the gesture is progressing. Thus, by zooming the digital viewfinder (during the first portion of the gesture) at the first rate that is slower than the gesture rate, the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style zooms with reduced (or eliminated) sudden zooms in the viewfinder (and in recorded videos), even when the user provides imprecise or fest gestures for zooming. Similarly, by zooming fhe digital viewfinder (during the second portion of the gesture) at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate, the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style zooms while catching up to the user’s gesture to achieve the user’s requested zoom.

hi some examples, the first camera {e.g.. 1002) and the second camera (e.g., 1004) have fixed, but different, focal lengths, in some examples, the focal length, field of v lew. and optical zoom properties ofthe optical system is fixed for each of the cameras te.g., 1002, 1004).,

DK 2016 70627 A1 but the fixed focal length is different between the first camera (e.g., 1002) and the second camera (e.g., 1004). In some examples, the electronic dev ice (e.g., 1000) receives a request to record a video prior to detecting the gesture and, in response, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) records a video to memory, the video recording beginning before trie gesture is detected and ending after the gesture ends, in some examples, the recorded video includes zooming that corresponds to the zooming performed in the digital viewfinder (e.g., ί 014). In some examples, the same (or similar) images displayed in the viewfinder are stored in memory for the video.

|03f.i7| At block 1.1 IO, during the first portion of the gesture: the gesture progresses from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state corresponds to the first magnification level and the second state corresponds to the second magnification level that is higher than the first magnification level (e.g., if the gesture is maintained at the second state for at least a predetermined period of time the magnification level will come io rest at the second magnification level), and the electronic device (e.g,. ί 000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) from the first magnification level to an intermediate magnification level that is higher the first magnification level and lower than the second magnification level (e.g., the magnification level lags behind the gesture). Thus, by zooming the digital viewfinder (during the first portion of foe gesture) to the intermediate magn ification level that is less than the second magnification level (to which the second state corresponds), the electronic device performs smooth, cinematicstyle zooms with reduced (or eliminated) sudden zooms in the viewfinder (and in recorded videos), even when the user provides imprecise or fast gestures for zooming.

[0308] At block 1114, during the second portion of foe gesture; the gesture progresses from foe second state to a third state, wherein the third state corresponds to a third magnification level that is higher than the second magnification level and the intermediate magnification level (e.g., if foe gesture is maintained at the second state for at least a predetermined period of time the magnification level will come to rest at the second magnification level), and the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) from the intermediate magnification level that is lower than the second magnification level to the third magnification level (e.g., the magnification level catches up to the gesture, changing from the intermediate magnification level to foe third magnification level, wherein the intermediate magnification level is lower than the second magnification level). Thus, by zooming the digital viewfinder (during the second portion

DK 2016 70627 A1 of the gesture) to the third magnification level ( that corresponds to the third state), the electronic device performs smooth, ci nematic-style zooms wähle catching up to the user's gesture to achieve the user’s requested zoom.

[0309| hi some embodiments, the first state of the gesture is a state at which the contact (e.g.. 3030) is detected at a location that corresponds to a portion of a zoom control (e.g„ 3030) that corresponds to the first magnification level. In some embodiments, the, the second state of the gesture (e.g,, 1010) is a state at which the contact is detected at a location that corresponds to a portion of the zoom control (e.g,, 3030) that corresponds to ihe second magnification level). In some embodiments, the third state of the gesture (e.g., 1010) is a state at which tire contact is detected at a location that corresponds to a portion of the zoom control (e.g., 1030) that corresponds to the third magnification level, {031ÖJ In accordance with some embodiments, the first portion of the gesture includes movement of one or more contacts (e.g., I Öl Ö) on a touch-sensttlve surtace U g., a drag input or de-pinch input on a touch-sensitive display (e.g,, 1012)) and the rate at which the first portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contacts (e.g.,

1010). Thus, because the rate of the gesture is based on the rate of movement of the contacts, the electronic devices provides a user-machine interface that performs Intuitive zoom operations based on contact inputs. The second portion of the gesture includes continued movement of the one or more contacts (e.g., 1010) on the touch-sensiti ve surface (e.g,, a continuation of the drag input or the de-pinch input the touch-sensitive display ) and tire rate at which the second portion of tire gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contacts (e.g., 1010), during the second portion offhe gesture, the movement of the one or more contacts (e.g,, 1010) ceases while the one or more contacts (e.g., 1010) continue to be detected on the touchsensitive surface, hr some examples, the electronic device 1000 continues to zoom the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) after the movement of the one or more contacts (e,g._s 1010) has ceased (e.g,, the zooming lags behind fire movement of the contacts (e.g., 1010) for at least a portion of the gesture and then catches up when the movement of the contacts (e.g., 1Ö1Ö) stops.

(03111 In accordance with some embodiments, continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) after the movement of the one or more contacts (e.g., 1010) has ceased includes

DK 2016 70627 A1 gradually decreasing the rate at which the magnification level is increasing (e.g., decreasing the rate at which die zoom is increasing as the current, magnification level approaches the third magnification level that corresponds to the position at which the one or more contacts (e.g.,

1010) stopped moving). Thus, by managing the rate ofthe magnification based on the movement of the contacts ceasing (or slowing), the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style decreases in the zoom while achieving the user's requested zoom, even when the gesture includes abrupt changes.

|0312} In accordance with some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g,. 1014) at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate (e.g,, 1012) at which the gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing tlie rate at which the magnification level increases when the contact moves away from a starting position on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., so that the magnification level eases into a respective rate of changing the magnification level then eases out of the rate of changing foe magnification level to provide a smoother zooming effect). Thus, by managing foe rate of tlie magnification based on the movement of tlie contacts away from the starting position, the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style increases in the zoom, even when the gesture includes abrupt changes.

[0313] hi accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) concurrently displays, on the display (e.g.. 1012), with the digital view finder (e.g., 1014),3 zoom control (e.g., 1030) (e.g., an adjustable zoom control (e.g,, 1030) such as a zoom slider), wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control (e.g., 1030) correspond to a plurality of magnification levels, and a zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1040) (e.g., a draggable circle/square/any shape on the zoom slider). In response to the electronic device (e.g., 1000) detecting the gesture, the electronic device (e.g. , 1000) updates display of the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1040) to transition, at the gesture rate (e.g,, 1012), from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the plurality of positions, wherein the first position corresponds to the first magnification level ofthe plurality of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to the third magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) enables the user to perform the zoom operation by dragging the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1040) along the zoom control (e.g., 1030).

too

DK 2016 70627 A1 |0314{ hi accordance with some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder (e,g., 1Ö14) from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g., 5014) while smoothing the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which fee gesture progresses, hy limiting the rate of the zoom or the rate of change of the rate of fee zoom. Thus, by managing the rate of the magnification, the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style zooms, even when the gesture includes abrupt changes or is last. Thus, the eleetronie device (e.g., 1000) provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory. In some examples, the eleeironic device (e.g., 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) while smoothing fee rate at which the zoom occurs by limiting the rate of the zoom (e.g.. a max rate of zoom). In some examples, the eleetronie device (e.g., 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) while smoothing the rate at which the zoom occurs by limiting fee rate of change of the rate of the zoom. In some examples, the eleetronie device (e.g., 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 1014) while smoothing fee rate at which fee zoom occurs by limiting both fee rate of the zoom and the rate of change of the rate of the zoom.

{Ö3ί 5{ In accordance with some embodiments, during a third portion of the gesture that occurs before the first portion of the gesture, the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms fee digital viewfinder (e.g,, 1014) at a third rate feat corresponds to the gesture rate (e.g., 101.2) at which the gesture is progressing. Thus, the eleetronie device (e.g., .1000) provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory.

j(U16j In accordance with some embodiments, at a first time during fee first portion of the gesture, the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) at the first rate whiie a first gesture rate (e.g., 1016) of the gesture exceeds a threshold gesture rate, and (where the gesture is fast and pulling away from fee zoom, assuming fee first rate is the max zoom speed and the threshold gesture is fee gesture speed that corresponds to the first, rate) at a second time during the second portion of the gesture, the eleetronie device (e.g., 1000) zooms fhe digital view-finder (e.g., 1014) at the first rate while a second gesture rate (e.g., 1016) of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate (where the gesture has slowed or stopped and the zoom is catching up at the max zoom speed). Thus, by limiting zooming the digital viewfinder to a maximum zoom speed, the electronic device performs smooth, cinematic-style

101

DK 2016 70627 A1 zooms with reduced (or eliminated) high-speed zooms in the view tinder (and in recorded videos), evert when the user provides imprecise or fast gestures for zooming. Thus, in some examples, the digital viewfinder (e.g., 5014) reaches (e.g., maxes out at) a maximum zoom rate, which helps to smooth out zooms that occur while a video is being recorded. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory.

[0317] hi accordance with some embodiments, subsequent to detecting the gesture (e.g., 1010) and subsequent to zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g,, 1014) from the first magnification level to the third magnification level; the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) detects a tap gesture (e.g,, 1080, a touch gesture) at a location corresponding to a third position of die plurality of positions (e.g., at a location on a touch-sensitive display (e.g,, 1012) that corresponds to the third position), wherein the third position corresponds to a fourth magnification level of the plurality' of magnification levels. In response to detecting the tap gesture (e.g., 1080), the electronic device (e.g., 1000) zooms foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) from the third magnification level to the fourth magnification level.

[03181 in accordance with some embodiments, the zooming is limited to a maximum zoom rate, in some examples, the rate of change of the zoom rate is lim ited to a maximum zoomchange rate. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) provides a more visually pleasing zoom experience in the viewfinder and for videos recorded to memory by limiting zooms that are not smooth.

[0319] In accordance with some embodiments, in response to detecting the gesture, the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) displays, on foe display (e.g., 1012), a graphical magnification level indicator (e.g., 1090) (e.g., including text indication oft.be current magnification level) that indicates a current magnification level. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1.000) informs the user as to the current magnification level, [0320] In accordance with some embodiments, after foe graphical magnification level indictor has been displayed for a predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) has ceased, the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) ceases to display, on foe display (e.g., 1012). the graphical magnification level indictor. Thus, by ceasing to display the

102

DK 2016 70627 A1 graphical magnification leve! indicator when it is likely that the user needs access to the graph teal magnification level indicator (e.g.. after a predetermined period of time), the electronic device provides a less obstructed user interface (and, for example, viewfinder) that results in a more efficient user-machine interface. In some examples, the graphical magnification level indicator (e.g., 1090) is displayed while zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) and for a predetermined period of time after zooming the digital viewfinder fe.g.. 1014). In some examples, the graphical zoom indicator fades out after the second predetermined amount of time has elapsed.

|0321] In accordance with some embodiments, after the zoom control (e.g., 1030) has been displayed for a second predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) has ceased, the electronic device (e.g.. 1000) ceases to display, on the display (e.g., 1012), the zoom control (e.g., 1030). In some examples, the zoom control (e.g,, 1030) is only displayed while zooming the digital vie wfinder (e.g., 1014) and for a predetermined period of time after zooming the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014), In some examples, the zoom control (e.g., 1030) fades out after the second predetermined amount of time has elapsed.

[03221 in accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 1ÖÖÖ) displays (e.g., persistently), on the display (e.g., 1012), die zoom control (e.g., 1030) while displaying the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) (e.g. zoom control (e.g., 1030) is persistent.) Thus, the zoom control (e.g., 1030) is available to the user without the need for the user to provide additional [0323] In accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) detects a pinch gesture on the digital v tew finder (e.g., 1014) fe.g., the electronic device (e.g,. 1000) includes a touch-sensitive surface and the pinch gesture is detected at a location corresponding to the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014).), hi response to detecting the pinch gesture: the electronic device (e.g,, 1000) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1014) at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout the pinch gesture (e.g., without limiting the rate of change of the zoom to smooth the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which the gesture progresses). Thus, by zooming the digital viewfinder fe.g., 1014} at a rate that corresponds to the rate of the gesture, the electronic device provides the user witli a mechanism

103

DK 2016 70627 A1 that avoids the zoom-managing techniques described above, thereby providing the user with an option to directly manipulate the zoom of the viewfinder {and recorded videos), inc hiding zooms with high speeds and abrupt changes. Thus, when the electronic device {e.g., 1000) detects a pinch gesture corresponding to a zoom operation, the electronic device (e.g., 1000) does not smooth the rate o f the zoom, so that tlie zooming while pinching adjusts the magnification level with direct manipulation such that chan (e.g., 1010) start moving and end when ges in the magnification level start when the contacts the contacts fe.g., 10.10) stop moving.

{03241 In accordance with some embodiments, the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of magnification levels are positioned along tlie zoom control (e.g., 1092, 1030) such that the magnification levels are not distributed linearly.

{’0325] In accordance with some embodiments, a distance along the zoom control (e.g., 1030) between the lowest magnification level (e.g., 1 x magnification) and a magnification level that is double the lowest magnification level (e.g., 2x magnification) extends more than 25% ofa total distance of the zoom control and less than 45% of the total distance of the zoom control (e.g,, 1030) (e.g., 30% of the total distance of the zoom control (e.g., 1030)).

{0326{ In accordance with some embodiments, locations along ihe zoom control (e.g., 1030) corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished (e.g., snap points) from locations along the zoom control (e.g., 1030) corresponding to non-optical magnification levels. In some examples, the zoom control (e.g., 1030) includes markers for die lx and 2x magnification levels, which correspond to optical zooms ofa first camera and a second camera of the electronic device (e.g., 1000). Thus, by providing visually distinguished locations along the zoom control that correspond io optical magnification levels (as compared to non-optical magnification levels), the electronic device informs the user as to the magnification levels that are optical and (for example) provide higher quality' image characteristics, thereby reducing the need for the user to provide multiple inputs to try varying zoom magnification levels to achieve an Image with high quality'.

{0327) in accordance with some embodiments, the third position of the plurality of positions corresponds to att optical magnification level.

104

DK 2016 70627 A1 [9328] hi accordance with some embodiments, displaying the zoom control (e.g,, 1030) includes displaying the zoom control (e.g., '030 of FIG. (OQ and IOR) vertically on the display (e.g., 1012). In some examples, the zoom control (e.g.. 1030} is a straight line. Thus, the zoom control (e.g., 1030, 1092) is displayed at an orientation that is convenient tor the user to access.

[9329] In accordance with some embodiments, displaying the zoom control (e.g,, 1030) includes displaying the zoom control (e.g., 1030 of FIG, 108 and IOS) horizontally on the display (e.g., 1012). in some examples, die zoom control (e.g., 1030,1092) is a straight line. Thus, the zoom control (e.g., 1030) is displayed at an orientation that is convenient for the user to access.

]03301 Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method 1100 (e.g., FIGS, 11A) are also applicable in an analogous manner to die methods described below. For example, methods 700,900, 1300 optionally include one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1100. For example., the electronic viewfinder in method 1100 is analogous to the electronic viewfinder in methods 700, 900, and 1300. For brevity, these details are not repeated below.

10331[ FIGS. 12A-121 illustrate exemplar;/ devices and user interfaces for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments. Fhe user interlaces in these figures are used to illustrate processes described below, including the processes in FIG. 13, [0332] FIG. 12Ä illustrates an exemplary¹ electronic device 1200 with a first camera 1202, and optionally, a second camera 1204, on the rear of the electronic device 1200. In some examples, fhe first camera 1202 and the second camera 1204 have fixed, but different, focal lengths. In some examples, fee focal length, field of view, and/or optical magnification properties of the optical system is fixed for each of the cameras. In some embodiments, in addition to having different fixed focal lengths, the cameras (e.g.. 1202. 1204} have different fixed fields of view and different fixed optical magnification properties.

[0333 [ In some embodiments, fee first camera 1202 has a first field of view and fee second camera 1204 has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and ihe second field of view overlap. In some examples, the first camera 1202 and the second camera 1204 are sj

105

DK 2016 70627 A1 apart so that a parallax between images captured by the camera (e.g. 1202 and 1204} is used to determine depths for objects represented by different portions of the digital viewfinder, hi some embodiments, the first camera 12Ö2 and the second camera 1204 are located on a suriace of the electronic device 1200 and the optical axes of the cameras (e.g. 1202 and 1204) are arranged such that they are parallel . In some examples, the first camera 1202 and the second camera 1204 capture overlapping fields of view, for example, at least 50% overlapping, at least 90% overlapping, or more. In some examples, the first camera 1202 has a wider field of view than the second camera 3 204, but a lower optical zoom than the second camera 1204, In some examples, the second camera 1204 has a wider fiel d of view than the first camera 1202, but a lower optical zoom than the first camera 1202.

(0334} FIG. 128 illustrates the front of the electronic device 1200 including display 1212.

As illustrated in FIG. 128, in some embodiments, the electronic device displays, on die display 1212, a digital viewfinder 1214 (e.g., including a live or near-live preview image from die first camera 1202 or die second camera 1204 of the electronic device). In FIG, 12Ö, the digital viewfinder 1214 is at the first magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1222 on the zoom control 1230).

(03351 hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 128, prior to detecting the gesture, the electronic device 1200 concurrently displays, on the display, with the digital viewfinder 1214, a zoom control 1230, wherein a plurality of positions (e.g, 1222,1224, 1226) along the zoom control 1230 correspond to a plurality of magnification levels, a zoom indicator affordance 1240 at a first position 1222 of the plurality of positions along the zoom control 1230 corresponding to the first magnification level (e.g,, a draggable circle or square on die zoom control slider), and a target zoom point at a diird position 1226 of the plurality of positions along the zoom control that is different from the first position 1222, wherein die diird position 1226 corresponds to the third magnification level, and wherein a second position 1224 of the plurality of positions along the zoom control 1230 corresponds to the second magnification level. Thus, the electronic device 1200 provides the user with visual indications of the available magnification levels.

(0336( As illustrated in FIGS. 12C-12E, the electronic device 1200 detects a gesture 1220 (e.g., a drag gesture, a pinch gesture, a tap gesture) corresponding to an instruction to zoom the

106

DK 2016 70627 A1 digital viewfinder 1214 from a first magnification level (e.g,, rt 1 x magnification level of a first camera of the device, eorresponding to location 1222 on the zoom control 1230 j to a second magnification level (e.g., a magnification level eorresponding to a digital zoom of the first camera, a 1,8x magnification level, a magnification level corresponding to the first camera, corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom controi 1230) different from the first magnification level. The electronic device determines whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference (e.g.. the absolute difference) between the second magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom controi 1230) and a third magnification level (e.g., a magnification level that corresponds to a 1.x magnification level of a second camera of the device with a different focal length than the first camera, corresponding to location 1226 on the zoom control 1230} is less than a predetermined threshold (e.g,, within 0.25x magnification) (e.g,, a magnification level corresponding to an optical magnification level, 2x magnification, a magnification level corresponding to the second camera). The electronic device, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met,, zooms the digital viewfinder 12.14 from the first magnification level 1222 to the third magnification level 1226 (e.g., automatically, without additional user input), hi some examples, the predetermined zoom threshold is small enough such that it is advantageous to zoom the viewfinder from the first magnification level (that is a digital magnification) to a second magnification level (that is an optical magnification level). In some examples, the third magnification level is different from the second magnification level.

{0337] hi some examples, the third magnification level is higher than the second magnification level, and the second magnification level is higher than the first magnification level, |0338j in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, the electronic device 1200, zooms the digital viewfinder 1214 from the first magnification level (e.g,, corresponding to location 1222 on the zoom control 1230) to the second magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom control 1230) (e.g., automatically, without additional user input).

107

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0339} hi some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 12E, a second condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnificatton level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom control 1230) is less than the third magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1226 on the zoom control 1230), In some examples, the device 1200 automatically zooms the digital viewfinder 1214 to the third magnification level if the user has initiated a change to a magnification that is less than the third magnification level, |0340| In some embodiments, a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom control 3 230) is more than the third magnification level (e.g,, corresponding to location 1226 on fee zoom control 1230). In some examples, the device 1200 automatically zooms the digital viewfinder 1214 to fee third magnification level if the user has initiated a change to a magnification that is more than the third magnification level, [0341 ] In some embodiments, a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the absolute difference between the first magnification level (e.g,, corresponding to location 1222 on the zoom control 1230) and the second magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom control 1230) is greater than a second predetermined threshold level. In some examples, fee device 1200 automatically zooms to fee third magnification level if fee user has initiated a change that exceeds the predetermined adjustment threshold. Thus, if the user initiates a change that is minor or relatively small, the electronic device recognizes that the user is trying to achieve a very particular magnification level and does not automatically zoom the digital viewfinder to the third magnification level.

[0342i in some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 12E, the second magnification level (e.g., corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom control 1230) corresponds to a digital magnification level and wherein fee third magnification level (e.g,., corresponding to location 1226 on fee zoom control 1230) corresponds to an optical magnification level. Thus, the electronic device automatically transitions the digital viewfinder 1214 to a magnification that is optical, rather than, digital. In some examples, this provides a higher quality viewfinder and higher quality images feat are captured using the magnification.

IOS

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0343] In some embodiments foe electronic device includes a first camera 1202 and a second camera 1204, and wherein the displayed digital viewfinder 1214 is based on data received from at least one of the first camera 1202 and the second camera 1204 , in some embodiments the electronic device 1200 includes a first camera 1202 not the second camera 1204, [0344] In some embodiments, the digital viewfinder 1214 is based on data received from the first camera 1202 (e.g,, not foe second camera 1204) when foe digital viewfinder 1214 is zoomed to the second magnification level (e.g,, corresponding to location 1224 on the zoom controi 1230 ) and wherein foe digital viewfinder 12 .14 is based on data received from foe second camera 1204 (e.g,, not foe first camera1202) when the digital viewfinder 1214 is zoomed to the third magnification level (e.g,, corresponding to location 1226 on the zoom control 1230), [0345] In some embodiments, as Illustrated in FIG. 12F, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, the electronic device 1200, updates foe display of the zoom indicator affordance 1240 from the first position 1222 to the third position 1224 corresponding to the third magnification level. Thus, foe electronic device provides the user with visual indications of the current and available magnification levels. In some examples, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, the electronic device 1200 updates foe display of the zoom indicator affordance 1240 to the third position 1224 corresponding to the third magnification level.

[0346] In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, the electronic device 1200 updates display of the zoom indicator affordance 1240 from the first position 1222 to the second position 1224 corresponding to foe second magnification level. Thus, the electronic device provides the user with visual indications of foe current and available magnification levels.

)03471 In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. S 211 and FIG. 121, in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, the electronic device 1200 updates display of the target zoom point 1270 to expand to encapsulate foe zoom i ndicator affordance when the zoom indicator affordance 1240 is displayed at the second position 1.272 (e.g., within a predetermined distance fiom the target zoom point 1270, within a predetermined distance from the third position 1226), 5.n some examples, foe zoom indicator affordance S 240

109

DK 2016 70627 A1 expands to encapsulate foe target zoom point 1270 (which, for example, remains stationary and visually unchanged) as foe zoom indicator affordance 1240 gets closer to die target zoom point (e.g., within a predetermined distance from the target zoom point 1270, within a predetermined distance from the third position 1226).

|0348] In some embodiments, as illustrated in FIG. 121, a fifth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met the electronic device 1200 detects an input lift-off signal associated with the gesture1220. In some examples, the electronic device 1200 determines that the gesture 1220 has ended, such as by detecting a lift-off of a touch performed on a touch-sensitive surface.

{0349] In some embodiments, the first camera 1202 has a first field of view and the second camera 1204 has a second held of view. In some examples, the first field of view and the second field of view overlap. In some examples, the first field of view and the second field of view are different. In some examples, zooming the digital viewfinder 1214 from the first magnification level to foe third magnification level includes, visually compensating for the difference between foe first field of view and the second field of view to reduce shifting of an image displayed in the digital viewfinder 1214. In some examples, the electronic device shifts the images in the digital viewfinder to counter foe parallax effect when transitioning the electronic viewfinder 1214 from display based on data front the fir st camera 1202 to display based on data from the second camera 1204.

{0350] In some embodiments, while the magnification level of the digital \ iewfinder 1214 is at a fourth magnification level that is different from the thud magnification level, foe electronic device 1200, detects a tap input at a location (e.g., 1226) that corresponds to a respective portion of the zoom control 1230. In response to foe electronic device 1200 detecting the tap input, in accordance with a determination, at the electronic device 1200, that the respective portion of the zoom control 1230 corresponds to the third magnification level, the electronic device zooms the digital viewfinder 1214 to the third magnification level. For example, the electronic device 1214 zooms the digital viewfinder 1214 to the magnification level that corresponds to a l x magnification level of a second camera 1204 of the device (e.g., which displays in foe user interface as a “2x'^! magnification of foe electronic viewfinder 1214, based on the second camera 1204 having an optical magnification that is 2x that of the fitst camera 1202) in response to a tap

HO

DK 2016 70627 A1 gesture on the portion of the zoom control that corresponds to the lx magnification level of the second camera 1204 of the device, in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to a magnification level that is different from the third magnification level 1226, the electronic device maintain the digital viewfinder 1214 at the fourth magnification level.

{0351} In some embodintents, the electronic device 1214 does not zoom to a different magnification level in response io a tap gesture somewhere else on the zoom control. Thus, in some embodiments, it is easier for the user to get back to the lx magnification level of the second camera of the device than io oilier magnification levels so as to make it easier for the user to select the lx magnification level of the second camera of the device. This provides better visual quality for images than magnification levels at which a digital zoom operation is being performed by digitally cropping and enlarging a 1 x magnification image captured by a corresponding camera, {0332} In some embodiments, the lx magnification level tor the first camera 1202 can also be tapped (e.g., detecting a tap gesture) to switch to the lx magnification level for the first camera 1202, In some einhodiments, lx magnification levels for one or more additional cameras can also be tapped to switch to the lx magnification level for those cameras, while still discouraging the user from causing the electronic device 1200 to switch to magnification levels between lx magnification levels for the different cameras (e.g,, intermediate magnification levels between the lx magnification levels for the different cameras, that correspond to magnification levels at which a digital zoom operation is being performed, can be reached by dragging a thumb of a zoom control to a location corresponding to one of those intermediate magnification levels), {0353j FIG, 13 is a flow diagram illustrating a method for managing camera effects, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1300 is performed at an electronic device (e.g,, 100,300, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200) with a first camera, a second camera, and a display. Some operations in method 1300 are, optionally, combined, the order of some operations are, optionally, changed, and some operations are. optionally, omitted.

Ill

DK 2016 70627 A1 {0354] At block i 302, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) displays, on the display (e.g., 1212), a digital viewfinder te.g., 1214) (e.g.. including a lise or near-live preview image trom a first camera (e.g., 1202) or a second camera (e.g., 1204) of the electronic device (e.g., 1200)).

(03551 At block 1304, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects a gesture (e.g., 1220) (e.g., a drag gesture, a pinch gesture, a tap gesture) corresponding to an instruction to zoom tlie digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) front a first magnification level (e.g., a lx magnification level of a first camera (e.g., 1202) of the electronic device(e.g., 1200)) to a second magnification level (e.g., a magnification level corresponding to a digital zoom of the first camera (e.g,, 1202), a l,8x magnification level, a magnification level corresponding to tlie first camera (e.g,, 1202)) different from the first magnification level.

{0356] At blocks 1306-1308, tlie electronic device (e.g., 1200) determines whether a set of one or more conditions has been met. A first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference (e.g., the absolute difference) between the second magnification level and a third magnification level (e.g,, a magnification level that corresponds to a ix magnification level of a second camera (e.g., 1204) of the device with a different focal length than the first camera (e.g., 1202)) is less than a predetermined threshold (e.g., within 0.25x magnification) (e.g., a magnification level corresponding to an optical magnification level, 2x magnification, a magnification level corresponding to the second camera (e.g., 1204)). Thus, by including a condition that is met when the user attempts to zoom to a magnification level that is close to tlie third magnification level (e.g., an optical magnification level), the electronic device avoids making large changes to the magnification level requested by the user, thus avoiding the need for the user to readjust the magnification multiple times to achieve a desired effect, in some examples, the third magnification level is different from the second magnification level.

]0357] At block 1310, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, die electronic device (e.g,, 1200) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) from the first magnification level to the third magnification level (e.g., automatically, without additional user input), in some examples, the predetermined zoom threshold is small enough such that it is advantageous io zoom the viewfinder (e.g.. 1214) from the first magnification level (e.g.. a digital magnification) to a second magnification level (e.g.. an optical

112

DK 2016 70627 A1 magnification level). Thus, by zooming the digital viewfinder to the third magnification level (e.g., an optical magnification level), the electronic device precisely zooms the digital viewfinder to a pre-selected magnification level even when the user input is imprecise, (03581 At block 1312, in accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, tlie electronic device (e.g., 1200) zooms tlie digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) front the first magnification level to the second magnification level (e.g., automatically, without additional user input).

|03?9| In accordance vviih some embodiments, a second condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is less than the third magnification level. In some examples, the device automatically moves to the third magnification level if the user has initiated a change to a magnification that is less than the third magnification level. Thus, by including a condition that is only met when the user-requested magnification level is less than the pre-selected magnification level (e.g., the third magnification level), the electronic device automatically overrides the user's requested zoom of the digital viewfinder in some circumstances, while the user maintains control in other circumstances, thereby eliminating the need for the user to pro vide inputs to selectively enable and disable the feature.

|Ö3dÖ] In accordance with some embodiments, a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is more than the third magnification level. In some examples, the de vice automatically moves to tlie third magnification level if the user has initiated a change to a magnification that is more than the third magnification level. Thus, by including a condition that is only met when the user-requested magnification level is more than the pre-selected magnification level (e.g,, the third magnification level), the electronic device automatically overrides the user’s requested zoom ofthe digital viewfinder in some circumstances, while the user maintains control in other circumstances, thereby eliminating the need for the user to provide inputs to selectively enable and disable the feature.

[ 03611 In accordance with some embodiments, a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the absolute difference between tlie first magnification level and the second magnification level is greater than a second predetermined threshold level. In some examples, the device automatically moves to the third magnification level if the user has initiated

113

DK 2016 70627 A1 a change that exceeds the predetermined adjustment threshold. Thus, if the user initiates a change that is minor or relatively small, the electronic device {e.g., 1200) recognizes that the user is trying to achieve a very·' particular magnification level and does not automatically zoom the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) to the third magnification level, thereby providing the user with the ability to achieve precise zooming using precise user inputs, while maintaining the ability to achieve precise zooming using imprecise user inputs.

)0362) In accordance with some embodiments, the second magnification level corresponds to a digital magnification level and wherein the third magnification level corresponds to an optical magnification level. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1200), by automatically transitioning the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) to a magnification that is optical, rather than digital, overrides the user’s requested magnification level (e.g.. the second magnification level) so that the viewfinder (and accordingly, pictures taken while displaying the viewfinder) uses a magnification level that does not rely on digital zoom, thereby providing higher quality images. In some examples, this provides a higher quality viewfinder (e,g„ 1214) and higher quality images that are captured using file magnification.

)03631 in accordance with some embodiments, the electronic device (e.g., 12ÖÖ) includes a first camera (e.g., 1202) and a second camera (e.g., 1204), and wherein the displayed digital viewfinder (e.g.. 1214) is based on data received from at least one ofthe first camera (e.g., 1202) and the second camera (e.g., 1204), )0364) In accordance with some embodiments, the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) is based on data received from the first camera (e.g., 1202) (e.g., not the second camera (e.g., 1204)) when the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) is zoomed to the second magnification level and wherein the digital view finder (e.g., 1214) is based on data received from the to the second camera (e.g,,

1204) (eg., not the first camera (e.g., 1202)) when the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) is zoomed to the third magnification level.

)0365} in accordance with some embodiments, prior to detecting the gesture (e.g., 1220), the electronic device (e.g,, 1200) concurrently displays, on the display (e.g., 1212), with the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214); a zoom control (e.g., 1230), wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control {e.g,, 1230) correspond to a plurality of magnification levels, a zoom indicator

114

DK 2016 70627 A1 affordance ie.g., 1240} at a first position ofthe plurality of positions along the zoom control ie.g.. 1230) corresponding to the first magnification level ie.g., a draggable circle or square on the zoom control (e.g., 1230) slider), and a target zoom point (e.g., 1270) at a third position of the plurality of positions along tire zoom control (e.g., 1230) that is different from the first position, wherein the third position corresponds to fhe third magnification level, and a second position of the plurality of positions along the zoom control (e.g.. 1230} corresponds to the second magnification level. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) provides the user with visual indications ofthe current and available magnification levels.

In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance wife a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, fhe electronic device (e.g., 1200) updates display of the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1240) from fee first position to the third position corresponding to fhe third magnification level. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) provides the user wife visual indications of the current and available magnification levels.

|ff367| In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, the electronic device (e.g., 1200} updates display of the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 124Ö) from fee first position to the second position corresponding to the second magnification level. Thus, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) provides the user with, visual indications of the current and available magnification levels.

In accordance with some embodiments, in accordance wife the determination that fee set of one or more conditions has been met, the electronic device (e.g,, 1200) updates display of the target zoom point (e.g., 1270) to expand to encapsulate the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1240} when the zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1240} is displayed at the second position. In some examples, fee zoom indicator affordance (e.g., 1240) expands to encapsulate fee target zoom point (e.g., 1270) as the zoom indicator affordance (eg., 1240) gets closer to fee target that the set of one or more conditions has been met, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) updates zoom point (e.g., 1270), Thus, by expanding the target zoom point to encapsulate the zoom indicator affordance, the electronic device informs the user feat the requested magnification level will be automatically overridden with the third magnification level, thereby prompting the user to make necessary accommodations. In some embodiments, in accordance with the determtnation

115

DK 2016 70627 A1 display of toe zoom indicator affordanee (e.g., 12040) to encapsulate the target zoom point (e.g.. 1270) when the zoom indicator affordanee (e.g,, 1240) is displayed at the second position. Thus, by expanding the zoom indicator affordanee to encapsulate the target zoom point, the electronic device informs the user that the requested magnification level will he automatically overridden with the third magnification level, thereby prompting the user to make necessary accommodations.

[0369] hi accordance with some embodiments, a filth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the electronic device (e.g., 1200) detects an input lift-off signal associated with the gesture (e.g,, 1220). In some examples, the electronic device (e.g., 1200) determines that the gesture (e.g., 1220) has ended, such as by detecting a lift-off of a touch performed on a touch-sensitive surface.

|0370| hi accordance with some embodiments, the first camera (e.g.. 12(32) has a first field of view and the second camera (e.g., 1204) has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view are different, and wherein zooming toe digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes; the electronic device (e.g., 1200) visually compensating for the difference between the first field of view and the second field of view to reduce shifting of an image displayed in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214). In some examples, the electronic device (e.g,, 1200) shifts the Image in the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) to counter the parallax effect when transitioning the viewfinder (e.g., 1214) to dispiay based on data from the first camera (e.g., 1202) to display based on data from the second camera (e,g„ 1204), [0371J hi accordance with some embodiments, whi le the mag viewfinder (e.g., 1214) is a fourth magnification level that Is diffe nification level of the digital rent from the third magnification level, the electronic device (e.g,, 1200) detects a tap Input at a location that corresponds to a respective portion of the zoom control (e.g., 1230). In response to the electronic device fe.g.. 120G) detecting the tap input; in accordance with a determination that, the respective portion of (he zoom control (e.g., 1230) corresponds to the third magnification level, the electronic device (e.g., I200) zooms the digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) to the third magnification

116

DK 2016 70627 A1 level, and (e.g., zoom to the magnification level that corresponds to a lx magnification level of a second camera (e.g.. 1204) ofthe device in response io a tap gesture (e.g., 1220) on the portion of the zoom control (e.g.. 1230) that corresponds to the ί x magnification level of a second camera (e.g., 1204) of foe device), in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control (e.g., 1230) corresponds to a magnification level that is different from the third magnification level, the electronic device (e.g.. 1200)maintains foe digital viewfinder (e.g., 1214) at the fourth magnification level (e.g., don't zoom to a different magnification level in response to a tap gesture somewhere else on foe zoom control (e.g., 1230)), [0372] In some examples, it is easier to get hack to the lx magnification level of Ae second camera (e.g., 1204) of the device than to other magnification levels of the device so as to make it easier for users to select the lx magnification level of the second camera (e.g., 1204, shown as 2X in figure I2F because it is approximately 2X of Ae IX zoom of the first camera) ofthe device which provides better visual quality for images than magnification levels at which a digital zoom operation is being performed by digitally cropping and enlarging a 1 x magnification image captured by a Ae corresponding camera.

103731 In some examples, the lx magnification level for foe first camera (e.g., 1202) can also be tapped to switch to the 1 x magnification level for Ae first camera (e.g., 1202). In some examples, lx magnification levels for one or more additional cameras can also be tapped to switch to Ae lx magnification level for those cameras (e.g., 1202, 1204), while still preventing foe user from switching to magnification levels between lx magnification levels for foe different cameras (e.g., 1202,1204)) (e.g.. Intermediate magnification levels between Ae lx magnification levels for tlie different cameras (e.g., 1202,1204), that correspond to magnification levels at whic h a digital zoom operation is being perfonned, can be reached by dragging a thumb of a zoom control (e.g. , 1230) to a location corresponding to one of those intermediate magnification levels).

[0374] Note that details of the processes described above with respect to method 1300 (e.g.,

FIGS. 13A) are aiso applicable in an analogous manner to Ae methods described below. For example, methods 700, 900, 1100 optionally include one or more of the characteristics of the various methods described above with reference to method 1300. For example. Ae electronic

DK 2016 70627 A1 viewfinder in method 1300 is analogous to the electronic viewfinder in methods 700, 900, and 1100, For brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0375] In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 14 shows an exemplary functional block diagram of an electronic device 1400 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, the functional blocks of electronic device 1400 are configured to perform the techniques described above. The functional blocks of the device 1400 are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described examples, it is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG, 14 are.

optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition offhe functional blocks described herein.

[0376] As shown in FIG. 14, an electronic device 14ÖÖ includes a display unit 1402 configured to display a graphic user interface, a first camera unit 1404, a second camera unit

1406, and a processing unit 1408 coupled to the display unit 1402, the first camera unit 1404, and the second camera unit 1406. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 includes an applying unit 1410, a changing unit 1412, a capturing unit 1414, a detecting unit 1416, a generating unit 1418, and a display enabling unit 1420.

[0377] The processing unit 1408 is configured to; enable display (e.g.. with display enabling unit 1420), on the display unit 1402, of a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received trom the first camera unit 1404; and while enabling display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1420} of the digital viewfinder: in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, apply (e g., with apply rtnu unit 1410) a simulated optical effect to die preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein

Si icond camera unit 1406; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1420) of the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera unit 1404 and the

118

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0378] hi some embodiments, prior to applying the simulated optical effect to the preview in the digital viewfinder, the preview in the digital viewfinder is not based on the second camera unit 1406. in some embodiments, the simulated optical effect is a simulated bokeh. In some embodiments, the simulated optical effect is applied differently to different portions of the preview in the digital viewfinder, [0379[ In some embodiments, a first portion of the preview depicts a first object, wherein the fust object is at a first distance from the electronic device, a second portion of the preview depicts a second object, wherein the second object is a second distance from die electronic device, and applying the simulated optical effect to the preview includes applying the simulated optical effect to the first portion with a first magnitude and applying the simulated optical effect to the second portion with a second magnitude that is different from the first magnitude, [0380| hi some embodiments, the first camera unit .1404 has a first field of view and the second camera unit 1406 has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap,

10381] hi some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; generate (e.g,, with generating unit 1418} a depth map based on data received from the first camera unit 1404 and the second camera unit 1406; and wherein the simulated optical effect is based on the depth map.

|0382] hi some embodiments, the electronic device automatically determines a distance to the subject. In some embodiments, a second condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera unit 1404 exceeds a minimum distance threshold.

[03831 In some embodiments, a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a locus distance of the first camera unit 1404 does not exceed a maximum distance threshold, in some embodiments, a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when tbe subject is detected beyond a predetermined minimum distance from the device. In some embodiments, a fifth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light exceeds a minimum light threshold.

119

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0384J hi some embodiments, a sixth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light does not exceed a maximum light threshold.

[0385] In some embodiments, the determination of whether the set of one of more conditions ts met is based on data from the first camera unit 1404.

[0386] hi some embodiments, the determination of whether the set of one of more conditions ts met is based on data from the second camera unit 1406.

|0387[ In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions are not met; enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1420), on the display unit 1402, of a graphical indication of a condition that is not met.

[0388] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; in response to detecting the subject, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit .1420), on the digital viewfinder on the display uni t 1402, of one or more v isual markers that identify the subject; and wherein a first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers is based on whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

[0389j In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, change (e.g..

with changmu unit 1412}the first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers.

[0390| In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; m accordance with detecting the subject, enable display (e.g,, with display enabling unit .1420), in the digital viewfinder on the display unit 1402, of one or more visual markers identifying the subject; and wherein a second characteristic of the one or more visual markers is based on a characteristic of the subject.

(0391] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to; in accordance with failing to detect the subject, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit

1420), in the digital viewfinder on the display unit 1402, of one or more visual markers that are centered in the digital viewfinder.

120

DK 2016 70627 A1 {0392) hi some embodiments, fhe processing unit 1408 is further configured to: in accordance with detecting a plurality of subjects, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1.420), in the digital viewfinder on the display unit 1402, of a plurality of one or more visual markers corresponding to the plurality of subjects.

[0393] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to: in accordance with applying the simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1420), on the display unit 1402, of a graphical indication feat the simulated optical effect is being applied to the. preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder; and in accordance with displaying the preview in fee digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect, forgo enabling display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1420), on the display unit 1402, of the graphical indication that the simulated optical effect is being applied to tlie preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, [0394] hi some embodiments, the processing unit 1408 is further configured to: detect (e.g., wife detecting unit 1416) user input requesting to capture an image; and in response io detecting the user input requesting to capture the image: in accordance with fee determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, capture (e.g., with capturing unit 1414) fee image without the simulated optical effect; in accordance with fee determination that the set of one or mom conditions is met, capture (e.g., wife capturing unit 1414) the image with fee simulated optica! effect, |0395{ In some embodiments, fee processing unit 1408 is further configured to: while the preview is displayed in the digital viewfinder without applying fee simulated optica! effect, detect (e.g., with detecting unit 1416) a change in fee scene In front of fee camera units 14041406; and in response to detecting the change in the scene: in accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has caused the set of one or -more conditions to be met, apply (e.g,, with applying unit 1.414) die simulated optical effect io die preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder; and in accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has not caused the set of one or more conditions to be met. maintain display (e.g.., with display enabling unit 1420) of the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optica! effect.

121

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0396] The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 7A-7B are, optionally, implemented by components depicted m FIGS. 1A-F8 or FIG. 14. For example, displaying operation 702 and displaying operation 722, and dividing operation 706 are, optionally, implemented- hy event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event defi nitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub event, such as activation of an affordance on a user interface. When a respective predefined event, or sub-event, is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handier 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a. respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would he clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can he implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

[0397] In accordance with some embodiments. FIG. 15 shows an exemplary functional block diagram of an electronic device 1500 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, the firnctional blocks of electronic device 1500 are configured to perform the techniques described above. The functional blocks of the device 1500 are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry’ out the principles of the various described examples. It is understood by persons of skill In the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 15 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[03W| As shown in FIG. 15, an electronic device 1500 includes a display unit 1502 configured to display a graphic user interface, a first camera unit 1504, a second camera unit

1506. and a processing unit 1508 coupled to the display unit 1.502, the first camera unit 1504,

122

DK 2016 70627 A1 and the second camera unit 1506, In some embodiments, the processing unit 1508 includes a detecting unit 1510, a zooming unit i512, and a display enablingunit 1514.

I'he processing unit 1508 is configured to: concurrently enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1514), on the display unit 1502, of: a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera unit 1504 that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a fust magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by die device using one or more of the first and second camera units 1504-1506; detect (e.g., with defecting unit 1510} activation of the affordance; in response to detecting activation of the affordance: cease to enable (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1514) display, on the display unit 1502, of the user Interlace for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera unit 1504; and enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1514), on the display unit 1502, of a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera unit 1506 that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

[9490] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1508 is further configured to: detecting (e.g., with detecting unit 1510) a user input in die digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the user input: enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1514), on the display unit 1502, of a zoom control; and perform a zoom of the digital viewfinder in accordance with the user input.

[9401] In some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a pinch gesture in the digital viewfinder. In some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a drag gesture in the digital viewfinder. In some embodiments, the user input corresponds to a swipe gesture in the digital viewfinder, lu some embodiments, the zoom control includes a zoom indicator affordance.

|9492| hi some embodiments, the zoom control includes a plurality of locations corresponding to a plurality of magnification levels, and wherein a first location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a first optical magnification level and a second location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a second optical magnification level that is different from the first optical magnification level .

123

DK 2016 70627 A1 {0403{ hi some embodiments, the processing unit 1508 is further configured to: detect te.g., with detecting unit 1510) a gesture corresponding to the zoom control· the gesture having a direction and a length; in response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a first direction, perform (e.g,, with zooming unit 1512) a zoom-out of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on tlie magnitude of the gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a second direction different horn the first direction, perform {e.g,, with zooming unit 1512) a zoom-in of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on tlie magnitude of die gesture, {04041 In some embodiments, die afiordance for modifying the magnification is displayed in accordance with a determination that die electronic device includes camera units 1504-1506 with overlapping fields of view.

[04051 h’ some embodiments, the processing unit 1508 is further configured to: detect (e.g., with detecting uni t 1514) a second activation of the affordance for modifyi ng the magnification; in response to detecting the second activation of the affordance for modifying the magnification: cease to enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1514), on the display unit 1502, of the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera unit 1506; and enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1514), on the display unit 1502, of the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera unit 1504 that includes displaying the digital viewfinder with the first magnification.

{04061 In some embodiments, the displayed zoom controi fades out m response to detecting an input hlt-off signal associated with the user input in the digital v iewfinder and wherein the displayed affordance for modifying the magnification does not. fade out in response detecting the input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder.

{04071 la some embodiments, displaying, on the display unit 1502, the zoom control includes replacing display of the affordance for modifying the magnification with display of the zoom controi.

124

DK 2016 70627 A1

10408] The operations described above with reference to FIG. 9 are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS, S A-ί B or FIG. 15. For example, displaying operation 902 and detecting operation 908 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event, recognizer 180, and event handler 190, Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touchsensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub event, such as activation of an affordance on a user interlace. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an evei handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater .1 /6 or object updater 177 to update the application Internal state 192, in some embodiments, event handler

190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would he clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

{0409{ In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 16 shows an exemplary functional block diagram of an electronic device 1600 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. In accordance with some embodiments, the functional blocks of electronic device 1600 are configured to perform the techniques described above. The functional blocks of the device 1600 are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described examples, it is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 16 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of foe functional blocks described herein.

{0410] As shown in FIG. 16, an electronic device 1600 includes a display unit 1602 configured to display a graphic user interface, one or mow camera units 1604, and a processing unit 1606 coupled to the display unit 1602 and the one more camera units 1604, In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 includes a zooming unit 1608, a detecting unit 1610, and a display enabling unit 1612.

125

DK 2016 70627 A1 (0411] The processing unit 1606 is configured to; enable display (e.g.. with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602, of; a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more camera units 1604; while enabling display of the digital viewfinder, detect a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level; in response to detecting the gesture, zoom (e.g., with zooming unit 1608) the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including; during a first portion of the gesture, zoom (e.g,, with zooming unit. 1608) the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at. which, the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zoom {e.g,, with zooming unit 1608) the digital viewfinder at. a second rate that is faster than foe gesture rate at which die gesture is progressing, (0412] In some embodiments, d uring the first portion of the gesture; the gesture progresses from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state corresponds to the first magnification level and die second state corresponds to the second magnification level that is higher than the first magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from fhe first magnification level to an intermediate magnification level that is higher the first magnification level and lower than die second magnification level; and during the second portion of the gesture; the gesture progresses from the second state to a third state, wherein the third state corresponds to a third magnification level that is higher than the second magnification level and the intermediate magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder trom the intermediate magnification level that is Sower than the second magnification level to the third magnification level, (0413] In some embodiments, the first portion of the gesture includes movement of one or more contacts on a touch-sensitive surface and the rate at which the first portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contac ts ; the second port ion of the gesture includes continued movement of the one or more contac ts on the touch-sensi tive surface and the rate at which the second portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contacts; during the second portion of the gesture, the movement of the one or more contacts ceases while the one or more contacts continue to be detected on the

126

DK 2016 70627 A1 touch-sensitive surface; and the method including continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after the movement of the one or more contacts has ceased.

[0414] In some embodiments, continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after the movement of the one or more contacts has ceased includes gradually decreasing the rate at which the magnification level is increasing.

(04151 hi some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing the rate at which the magnification level increases when the contact moves away from a starting position on the touch-sensitive surface.

(04161 hi some embodiments, foe processing unit 1606 is further configured to: concurrently enable display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602, with foe digital viewfinder, of: a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control correspond to a plurality of magn ification levels; and a zoom indicator affordance; and in response to defecting the gesture, update display (e.g., with display enabling unit 16121 of the zoom indicator affordance to transition, at the gesture rate, from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the pl urality of positions, wherein foe first position cor responds to the first magnification level of the plurali ty of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to foe third magnificat ion level of foe p lurality of magnification levels.

[0417] In some embodiments, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes zooming the digital v iewfinder while smoothing foe rate at which the zoonung occurs relati ve to foe rate at which foe gesture progresses, by limiting the rate of foe zoom or the rate of change of the rate of the zoom.

[0418] In some embodiments, during a third portion of the gesture that occurs before the first portion of the gesture, zoom the di gital viewfinder at a third rate that corresponds to the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

(0419} In some embodiments, at a first time during the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at the first rate while a first gesture rate of foe gesture exceeds a threshold gesture rate; and at a second tune during the second portion of the gesture, zooming foe digital

127

DK 2016 70627 A1 viewfinder at the first rate while a second gesture rate of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate.

{0420( lu some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: subsequent to detecting the gesture and subsequent to zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level: detect (e.g., with detecting unit 1610) a tap gesture at a location corresponding to a third position of the plurality of positions, wherein the third positi on corresponds to a fourth magnific ation level o f the plurality of magnification le vels; and in response to detecting the tap gesture, zoom (e.g., with zooming unit 1608} the digital viewfinder from the third maanification level to the fourth maanification level.

{0421 { in some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: in response to detecting the gesture, enable display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602, of a graphical magnification level indicator that indicates a current magnification level.

{0422( In some einhodiments, the processing unit 16Ö6 is further configured to; after the graphical magnification level indictor has been displayed for a predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, cease to enable display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602, of the graphical magnification level indictor.

(0423( In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: after the zoom control has been displayed for a second predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, cease to enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602. of the zoom control.

(0424( In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further configured to: enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit 1612), on the display unit 1602, of the zoom control while enabling display of the digital viewfinder.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 1606 is further eonftgt ed to: detect (e.g .

with detecting unit 1610) a pinch gesture on the digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the pinch gesture: zoom (e.g., with zooming unit 1608) the digital viewfinder at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout the pinch gesture.

128

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0426] hi some embodiments, the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of magnification levels are positioned along the zoom control such that the magnification levels are not distributed linearly, [0427[ bi some embodiments, a distance along the zoom control between the lowest magnification level and a magnification level that is double the lowest magnification level extends more than 25% of a total distance of the zoom control and less than 45% of the total distance of the zoom control, |0428[ In some embodiments, locations along the zoom control corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished trom locations along tire zoom control corresponding to non-optical magnification level s. In some embodiments, the third position of the plurality of positions corresponds to an optical magnification level. In some embodiments, displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control vertically on the display. In some embodiments, displaying the zoom control ineludes displaying the zoom control horizontally on the display.

[0429] The operations described above with reference to FIG. 11 are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS, 1A-1B or FIG. 16. For example, displaying operation 1102 and detecting operation 1104 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub event, such as activation of an affordance on a user interface. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of die event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. hi some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how oiher processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1 A~! B.

129

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0430] hi accordance with some embodiments, FIG, 17 shows an exemplary functional block diagram of an electronic device POO configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. In accordance wife some embodiments, the functional blocks of electronic device 1700 are configured to perform the techniques described above. The functional blocks of fee device 1700 are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described examples. It is understood by persons of skill in the an that the functional blocks described in FIG. 17 are. optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described examples. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[04311 As shown in FIG. 3 7. an electronic device 1700 includes a display unit i~02 configured to display a graphic user interface and a processing unit 1704 coupled to the display unit 1702. In some embodiments, fee processing unit 1706 includes a deiermining umt 1706, a zooming unit 1708, detecting unit 1710, and a display enabling unit 1712, [0432] The processing unit 1704 is configured to: enable display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1702), on the display unit 1702, of a digital viewfinder; detect (e.g,, with detecting unit 1710) a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom fee digital viewfinder from a first magnificatton level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level; determine whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance wife a determination feat the set of one or more conditions has been met, zoom (e.g,, wife zooming unit 1708) tlie digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level, [04331 fe some embodiments, the processing unit 1704 is further configured to; in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, zoom (e.g., wife zooming unit 170S) fee digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the second magnification level.

[0434 [ In some embodiments, a second condition of the set ol one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is less than the third magnification ievel.

130

DK 2016 70627 A1 [9435] hi some embodiments, a third condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is more than the third magnification level.

[9436] In some embodiments, a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the absolute difference between the first magnification level and the second magnification level is greater than a second predetermined threshold level.

[0437] In some embodiments, the second magnification level corresponds to a digital magnification level and wherein the third magnificat ion level corresponds to an optical magnification level.

es a ii rst camera and a second on data received from at least one [9438] In some embodiments, fhe electronic des ice includ camera, and wherein fee displayed digital viewfinder is based of fee first camera and the second camera.

[9439] hi some embodiments, fee digital viewfinder is based on data received .from the first camera when the digital viewfinder is zoomed to the second magnification level and wherein fee digital viewfinder is based on data received from the to the second camera when the digital viewfinder is zoomed to the third magnification level.

[9449] hi some embodiments, the processing unit 1704 is further configured to: prior to detecting the gesture, concurrently enable display te.g.. with display enabling unit 1702}. on the display unit 1702. with the digital viewfinder., of. a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along fee zoom control correspond fo a plurality of magnification levels, a zoom indicator afifordanee at a first position ofthe plurality of positions along the zoom control corresponding to the first magnification level; and a target zoom point at a dnrd position ofthe plurality of positrons along the zoom control that is different from fhe first position, wherein the thud position corresponds to fhe third magnification levet; and wherein a second position of the plurality of positions along the zoom controi corresponds to die second magnification level.

[9441] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1704 is further configured to: in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, update display⁷ (e.g., with display enabling unit 1702) of the zoom indicator affordance from the first positron to die third positron corresponding fo the third magnificatron level.

131

DK 2016 70627 A1 {0442] hi some embodimenis, the processing unit 1704 is further configured to; in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, update display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1702) of the zoom indicator affordance from the first position to the second position corresponding to the second magnification level, [0443] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1704 is further configured to; in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, update display (e.g,, with display enabling unit 1702) of fhe target zoom point to expand to encapsulate the zoom indicator affordance when the zoom indicator affordance is displayed at the second position.

|0444{ In some embodiments, a fifth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when tlie electronic device detects an input lift-off signal associated with the gesture, [0445] In some embodiments, the first camera has a first field of view and the second camera has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and foe second field of view overlap, wherein foe first field of view and the second field of view are different, and wherein zooming foe digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes: visually compensating for the difference between the first field of view and the second field of view to reduce shifting of an image displayed in the digital viewfinder.

]0446{ In some embodiments, foe processing unit 1704 is further configured to; while the magnification level of fhe digital viewfinder is a fourth magnification level that is different from the third magnification level, detect te.g., with detecting unit 1710} a tap inpat at a location that corresponds to a respective portion of the zoom control; and in response to detecting the tap input; in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to the third magnification level, zoom (e.g,, with zooming unit 1708) the digital viewfinder to the third magnification level; and in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to a magnification level that is different from foe third magnification level, maintain (e,g„ with display enabling unit 1712) foe digital viewfinder at the fourth magnification level.

132

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0447] The operations described above with reference to FIG. 13 are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. I A-1 B or FIG. 17. For example, displaying operation 1302, defecting operation 1304, and determining operation 1306 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub event such as activation of an affordanee on a user interface. When a respective predefined event, or sub-event, is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handier 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would he clear' to a person having ordinary’ skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

|0448] Exemplary methods, devices, electronic devices, and non-transitory computerreadable storage media are set out in the foiiowing items.

1. A method, comprising;

at att electronic device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display;

displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder;

in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the second camera; and

133

DK 2016 70627 A1 in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, displaying die preview in the digital viewfinder without applying die simulated optical effect.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein prior to applying the simulated optical effect to the preview in the digital viewfinder, the preview in the digital viewfinder is not based on the second camera.

The method of any of items 1-2, wherein the simulated optical effect is a simulated bokeh.

4. The method of any of items 1-3, wherein the simulated optical effect is applied differently to different portions of the preview in the digital viewfinder.

5, The method of item 4., wherein a first portion of the preview depicts a first object, wherein the first object is at a first distance from the electronic device, a second portion of the preview depicts a second object, wherein the second object is a second distance from the electronic device, and applying the simulated optical effect to the preview includes applying the simulated optical effect to the first portion with a first, magnitude and applying the simulated optical effect to the second portion with a second magnitude that is different from the first, magnitude.

6. The method of any of items 1-5. wherein tire first camera has a first field of view and the second camera has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap.

7. The method of any of items 1-6. further comprising'.

generating a depth map based on data received front the first camera and the second camera; and wherein the simulated optical effect is based on the depth map.

134

DK 2016 70627 A1

8. The method of any of items distance to the subject.

i-7, wherein the electronic device automatically determines a

9. The method of any of items I -8, wherein a second condition of the set of one or mote conditions is met when a focus distance ofthe first camera exceeds a minimum distance threshold.

10. The method of any of items 1-9, wherein a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera does not exceed a maximum distance threshold,

S S. The method ofany of items 1-10, wherein a fourth condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when the subject is detected beyond a predetermined minimum distance from the device

1.2. The method of any of items 1-11, wherein a fifth condition of the set. of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light exceeds a minimum light threshold, .13, The method of any of items 1-12, wherein a sixth condition ofthe set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light does not exceed a maximum light threshold.

14. The method of any of items 1-13. wherein the determination of whether the set of one of more conditions is met. is based on data from the first camera.

15. The method of any of items 1-14, wherein tlie determination of whether the set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the second camera.

16, The method of any o f items 1-15, further comprising:

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions are not met:

displaying, on die display, a graphical indication of a condition that is not met.

135

DK 2016 70627 A1 i 7. The method of any of items I - i 6. further comprising:

in response to detecting the subject, displaying, on the digital viewfinder on the display, of one or more visual markers that identify the subject; and wherein a first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers is based on whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

18. The method of item 17, further comprising;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, changing the first visual characteristic ofthe one or more visual markers.

19. The method of any of items 1-18, fttrther comprising;

in accordance with detecting the subject, displaying, in the digital viewfinder on the display, one or more visual markers identifying the subject; and wherein a second characteristic ofthe one or more visual markers is based on a characteristic ofthe subject.

20. The method of any of items 1 - .19, further comprising.

in accordance with tailing to detect the subject, displaying, in the digital viewfinder on the display,, one or more visual markers that are centered in the digital viewfinder.

21. The method of any of items 1 -20, further comprising:

in accordance with detecting a plurality of subjects, displaying, in the digital viewfinder on the display, a plurality of one or more visual markers corresponding to the plurality of subjects.

22. The method of any of items 1-21, further comprising:

tn accordance with applying ihe simulated optical effect to the preview· displayed in the digital viewfinder, displaying, on the display, a graphical indication that the simulated optical effect is being applied to die preview displayed in the digital viewfinder; and

136

DK 2016 70627 A1 in accordance with displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect, forgoing displaying, on the display, the graphical indication that the simulated optical effect is being applied to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder.

23. The method of any of items 1-22, further comprising;

detecting user input requesting to capture an image; and in response to detecting the user input requesting to capture the image;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, capturing the image without the simulated optical effect;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, capturing the image with the simulated optical effect.

2-4, The method of any of items ί -23, including.

while the preview is displayed in the digital viewfinder without apply!ng the simulated optical effect, detecting a change in the scene in front of the cameras; and in response to detecting the change in the scene;

in accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has caused the set of one or more conditions to be met, applying the simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder; and m accordance with a determination that the change in the scene has not caused the set of one or more conditions to be met. maintaining display of the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

25. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to he executed by one or more processors ofa device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display, foe one or more programs including instructions for performing foe method of any of items 1 - 24.

26, An electronic device, comprising; a first camera, a second camera, j

DK 2016 70627 A1 a display;

one os snore processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing fee method of any of items 1 24.

27. An electronic device, comprising;

a first camera, a second camera, a display; and means for performing the method of am of items 1 - 24.

28. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device wife a first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for:

displaying, on fee display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from fee first camera; and while displaying fee digital viewfinder:

in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions ts met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from fee device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in fee digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect. is based on data received from fee first camera and fee second camera; and tn accordance with a determination that fee set of one or more conditions is not met. displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

29. An electronic device, comprising;

a first camera;

a second camera;

a displ ay ;

138

DK 2016 70627 A1 one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:

displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and white displaying the digital viewfinder;

in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical

30. An electronic device, comprising· a first, camera; a second camera; and means for displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera; and while displaying the digital viewfinder;

in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition offhe set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, means for applying a simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, wherein tire simulated optical effect is based on data received from the first camera and the second camera; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions is not met, means for displaying the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

139

DK 2016 70627 A1

A method, comprising;

at an electronic device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display; concurrently displaying, on the display;

a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from tire first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras;

detecting activation of foe affordance;

in response to detecting acti vation of the affordance:

ceasing to display, on foe display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

32. The method of item 31, further comprisi ng;

detecting a user input in the digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the user input;

displaying, on foe display, a zoom control; and performing a zoom of the digital viewfinder in accordance with the user input.

33. The method of item 32, wherein the user input corresponds to a pinch gesture in ihe digital viewfinder.

34. The method of item 32, wherein foe user input corresponds to a drag gesture, in the digital viewfinder,

35. The method of item 32, whciem die user input corresponds to a swipe gesture in the digital viewfinder.

140

DK 2016 70627 A1

36. The method of any of items 32 - 35, wherein the zoom control includes a zoom indicator affordance.

37. The method of item 36, wherein fhe zoom control includes a plurality of locations corresponding to a plurality of magnification levels, and wherein a first location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a fi rst, optical magnification level and a second location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a second optical magnification level that is different from the first optical magnification level .

38. The method of any of items 32 - 37, further comprising· detecting a gesture corresponding to the zoom control, fee gesture having a direction and a length;

in response to detecting the gesture corresponding to fee zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a first direction, performing a zoom-out of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture; and in response to detecting fee gesture corresponding to the zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a second direction different from fee first direction, performing a zoomin of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture.

39. The method of any of items 31 - 38, wherein the affordance for modifying the magnification is displayed in accordance wife a determination that the electronic device includes a plurality of cameras with overlapping fields of view.

40. The method of any of items 31 - 39, further comprising· detecting a second activation of fee affordance for modifying the magnification;

in response to detecting fhe second acti vation of the affordance for modifying fee magnification:

ceasing to display, on fee display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from fee second camera; and

141

DK 2016 70627 A1 displaying, on die display, the user inter&ce for capturing photos based on data received ironi die first camera that includes displaying the digital view tinder with the first magnification,

41. The method of any of items 32 - 39, wherein the displayed zoom control fades out in response to detecting an input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder and wherein the displayed affordance for modifying the magnification does not fade out in response detecting the input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder.

42. The method of any of items 32. - 39, wherein displaying, on the display, the zoom controi includes replacing display of the affordance for modifying the magnification with display of the zoom control.

A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to he executed by one or more processors ofa device with a first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of items 31-42.

44, An electronic device, comprising:

a first camera.

a second camera, a display;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to he executed hy the one or more processors, the one or more programs incl uding instr uc tions for performing the method of any of items 3 3 42.

45. An electronic device, comprising: a first camera, a second camera,

142

DK 2016 70627 A1 a display; and means tor performing the method of any of items 32-42.

46. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic dev ice with a first camera, a second camera, and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for:

concurrently displaying,, on tbe display:

a user interface for captaring photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for -modifying the magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras;

detecting activation of the affordance;

in response to detecting activation of the affordance.

ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from die first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data, received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

47. An electronic device, comprising;

a first camera;

a second camera;

a display ;

one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, foe one or more programs including instructions for;

concurrently displaying, on the display:

a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from foe first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by the dev ice using one or more o f foe first and second cameras;

143

DK 2016 70627 A1 detecting activation of the affordance;

in response to detecting activation of the affordance;

ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and displaying, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is sreater than the first maunification.

48. An electronic device, comprising; a first camera; a second camera; and a display;

means for concurrently displaying, on the display;

a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification·, and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more of the first and second cameras;

means for detecting activation of the affordance;

in response to detecting activation of the affordance;

means tor ceasing to display, on the display, the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from the first camera; and means for display mg, on the display, a user interface for capturing photos based on data recei ved from the second camera that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than the first magnification.

144

DK 2016 70627 A1

49, A method, comprising;

at an electronic device with one or more cameras and a · displaying, on the display;

a digital viewfinder based on data received from ihe one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level;

in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from tire first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including;

during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming' the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

SO. The method of item 49, wherein;

during the first portion of the gesture;

the gesture progresses from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state corresponds to the first magnification level and the second state corresponds to the second magnification level that is higher than the first magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to an intermediate magnification level that is higher the first magnification level and lower than the second magnification level; and during the second portion of the gesture ;

the gesture progresses from the second state to a third state, wherein the third state eorresponds to a third magnification level that is higher than the second magnification level and the intermediate magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from the intermediate magnification level that is Sower than the second magnification level to fee third magnification lev el.

145

DK 2016 70627 A1

51. The method of any of items 49 - 50, wherein;

the first portion ofthe gesture includes movement of one ot more contacts on a touchsensitive surface and the rate at which the first portion of the gesture is progress ing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contacts;

the second portion of the gesture includes continued movement of foe one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface and the rate at which the second portion ofthe gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement ofthe one or mote contacts;

during the second portion ofthe gesture, the movement of foe one or more contacts ceases while the one or more contacts continue to be detected on the touch-sensitive surface; and the method inciuding continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after the movement of the one or more contacts has ceased.

52. The method of item 51, wherein continuing to zoom the dtgital viewfinder after the movement of the one ot more contacts has ceased includes gradually decreasing the rate at which the magnification level is increasing.

53. The method of any of items 49 -51, wherein zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing the rate at which the magnification level increases when the contact moves away from a starting position on the touch-sensitive surface.

54. The method of any of items 49 - 52, further comprising; concurrently displaying, on the display, with the digital viewfinder;

a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control correspond to a plurality of magnification levels; and a zoom indicator affordance; and in response to detecting the gesture, updating display ofthe zoom indicator affordanee to transition, at foe gesture rate, from a first position ofthe plurality of positions to a second position ofthe plurality of positions, wherein the first position corresponds to the first magnification level of foe plurality of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to die third magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels.

146

DK 2016 70627 A1

55. The method of any of items 49 - 54, wherein zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes zooming the digital viewfinder while smoothing tire rate at which foe zooming occurs relative io foe rate at which foe gesture progresses, by limiting the rate of the zoom or foe rate of change of the rate of the zoom.

56. The method of any of items 49 - 55, wherein:

during a third portion of the gesture that occurs before the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a third rate that corresponds to the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

57. The method of any of items 49 - 56, wherein:

at a first time during foe first portion of the gesture, zooming foe digital viewfinder at foe first rate while a first gesture rate of foe gesture exceeds a threshold gesture rate; and at a second time during foe second portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at foe first rate while a second gesture rate of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate.

58. The method of any of items 49 - 57. further comprising:

subsequent to detecting the gesture and subsequent to zooming foe digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level:

detecting a tap gesture at a location corresponding to a third position of the plurality of positions, wherein the third position corresponds to a fourth magnification level of foe plurality·'of magnification levels; and in response to detecting foe tap gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the third magnification level to the fourth magnification level,

59. The method of any of hems 49 - 58, further comprising:

in response to detecting foe gesture, displaying, on the display, a graphical magnification level indicator that indicates a current magnification level.

147

DK 2016 70627 A1

60, The method of hern 59, further comprising:

after the graphical magnification level indictor has been displayed for a pi «determined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, ceasing to display, on the display, the graphical magnification level indictor,

I. The method of any of items 54 - 60. further comprising:

after the zoom control has been displayed for a second predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, ceasing to display, on the display, the zoom control.

62. The method of any of items 54 - 60, further comprising;

displaying, on the display, the zoom control while displaying the digital viewfinder.

63, The method of any of items 49 - 62, further comprising: detecting a pinch gesture on the digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the pinch gesture;

zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout the pinch gesture.

64. The method of any of items 54 - 63, wherein the plurality of positions corresponding io the plurality of magnification levels are positioned along the zoom control such that the magnification levels are not distributed linearly,

65. The method of any of items 54 - 64, wherein a distance along the zoom control between the lowest magnification level and a magnification level that Is double the lowest magnification level extends more than 25% of a total distance of the zoom control and less than 45% of the total distance of the zoom control.

66. The method of any of items 54 - 65, wherein locations along the zoom control corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished from locations along the zoom control corresponding to non-optical magnification levels.

148

DK 2016 70627 A1

67, The method of any of items 58 · 66, wherein the third position of the plurality of positions corresponds to an optical magnificatton level,

68, The method of any of items 54 · 67, wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control vertically on tire display,

69, Ihe method of atty of items 54 - 68. wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control horizontally on the display.

A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to he executed by one or more processors of a device with one or more cameras and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for perfermmg the method of any of items 49-69.

Att electronic device, comprising:

one or more cameras, a display;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of items 4969.

72. An electronic device, comprising:

one or more cameras, a display; and means for performing the method of an> of items 49-69.

73. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device with one or more cameras and a display, the one or more programs including instructions tor:

displaying, on the display:

a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras;

149

DK 2016 70627 A1 while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital v tew finder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level, in response to detecting foe gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including:

during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which foe gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder ata second rate that is fitster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

7-4, An electronic device, comprising.

one or more cameras;

a display;

one or more processors; and a memory storing one or snore programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions Ibr:

displaying, on the display:

a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras: while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding io an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level;

in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including:

during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder al a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and duri ng a second portion of foe gesture that occurs after the first por tion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than tlie gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

150

DK 2016 70627 A1

75. An electronic device, comprising: one or more cameras; and a display;

means for displaying, on the display:

a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level;

in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from fhe first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including:

during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of fhe gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

151

DK 2016 70627 A1

76, A method, comprising;

at an electronic device with a display;

displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder;

detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom foe digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level;

determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of tire set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that foe set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to foe third magnification level.

77. The method of item 76, further comprising;

in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from tbe first magnification level to the second magnification lev el.

The method of any of items 76 - 77 conditions is met when the second magnifi ir more level.

, wherein a second condition of foe set of one c cation level is less than the third magnification ”9. The method of any of items 76 - 77, wherein a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is more than the third magnification level

80. The method of any of items 76 - 79, wherein a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the absolute difference between the first magnification level and the second magnification level is greater than a second predetermined threshold level.

81. The method o f any of items 76 - 80, wherein foe second magnification level corresponds to a digital magnification level and wherein the third magnification level corresponds to an optical magnification level.

152

DK 2016 70627 A1

82, The method of any of items 76 - 81, wherein the electronic device ineludes a first camera and a second camera, and wherein the displayed digital viewfinder is based on data received from at least one of the first camera and the second camera.

83. The method of item 82 , wherein the digital viewfinder is based on data received from the first camera when the digital viewfinder is zoomed to the second magnification level anti wherein the digital viewfinder is based on data received from the second camera when the digital viewfinder is zoomed to the third magnification level.

84, The method of any of items 76 - 83, further comprising;

prior to detecting the gesture, concurrently displaying,, on the display, with the digital viewfinder;

a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control correspond to a plurali ty of magnification levels;

a zoom indicator affordance at a first position of the plurality of positions along the zoom control corresponding, to the first magnification level; and a target zoom point at a third position of the plurality'· of positions along the zoom control that is different from the first position, wherein the third position corresponds to the third magnification level ; and wherein a second position of the plurality of positions along the zoom control corresponds to the second magnification level.

85. The method of item 84. further comprising.

in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, updating display of the zoom indicator affordance from the first position to the third position corresponding to the third magnification level.

86. The method o f any of items 84 - 85, further compnsmg;

in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, updating display of tire zoom indicator affordance from foe first position to the second position corresponding to the second magnification level.

153

DK 2016 70627 A1

87. The method of any of items 84 - 86, further comprising;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, updating display of the target zoom point to expand to encapsulate the zoom indicator affordance when foe zoom indicator affordance is displayed at the second position.

88. The method of any of items 76 - 8 Λ wherein a. fifth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the electronic device detects an input lift-off signal associated with, the gesture.

89.

Ihe method of any of items 82 - 88 wherein the first camera has a first field of view and the second camera has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap, wherein the first field of vie w and die second field of view are different, and wherein zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes;

visually compensating for the difference between the first field of view and the second field of view to reduce shifting of an image displayed in the digital viewfinder.

90. The method of any of items 84 - 89, including:

while the magnification level of the digital viewfinder is a fourth magnification level that is different trom the third magnification level, detecting a tap input at a location that corresponds to a respective portion of the zoom control; and in response to detecting the tap input;

in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to the third magnification level, zooming the digital viewfinder to the third magnification level; and in accordance with a detennination that the respec tive portion of the zoom control corresponds to a magnification level that is different from the third magnification level.

maintain the digital viewfinder at the fourth magnification level.

154

DK 2016 70627 A1

91, A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a device with a display, tlie one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of items 76-90,

92. An electronic device, comprising:

a display:

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of items 7690.

. An electronic device, comprising:

a display; and means for performing the method of any of items 76-90.

94. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs' configured to be executed by one or more processors of an electronic device w ith a display, the one or more programs including instructions for:

displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder;

detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level;

determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherem a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

95. An electronic device, comprising;

a display;

one or more processors; and

155

DK 2016 70627 A1 a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions lor:

displaying, on the display, a digital viewfinder;

determining whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first condition of tire set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level.

96. An electronic device, comprising: a display; and means for displaying, on the display, a digital s iewfinder·.

means tor detecting a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder fern a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification level;

means for determining whet her a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first, condition of the set of one or more conditions is met. when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold, and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met. means for zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level, to the third magnification level.

156

DK 2016 70627 A1

An electronic device, comprising:

a first camera unit; a second camera unit; a display unit; and a processing unit coupled to foe first camera unit, the second camera unit, and to the display unit, foe processing unit configured to:

enable display, on foe display uni t of a digi tal viewfinder including a preview based on data received from the first camera unit; and while enabling display of the digital viewfinder;

in accordance with a determination that a set of one or more conditions is met, wherein a first condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a subject is detected within a predetermined distance from the device, apply a simulated optical effect to foe preview displayed in foe digital viewfinder, wherein the simulated optical effect is based on data received from foe first camera unit and foe second camera unit; and in accordance with a determination that tlie set of one or more conditions is not met, enable display of the preview in the digital viewfinder without applying foe simulated optical effect.

98. The electronic device of item 97, wherein prior to applying the simulated optical effect to foe preview in the digital viewfinder, the preview in the digital viewfinder is not based on foe second camera unit.

99. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 98, wherein the simulated optical effect is a simulated bokeh,

100. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 99. wherein the simulated optical effect is applied differently to different portions of the preview in the digital viewfinder.

101. The electronic device of item 100, wherein a first portion ofthe preview depicts a first object, wherein the first object is at a first distance from foe electronic device, a second portion of the preview depicts a second object, wherein the second object is a second distance from the

157

DK 2016 70627 A1 electronic device, and applying die simulated optical effect to the preview includes applying the simulated optical effect to the first portion with a first magnitude and applying the simulated optical effect to the second portion with a second magnitude that is different from the first magnitude.

102. The electronic device of any of items 9? - 101, wherein the first camera unit has a first field of view and the second camera unit has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap.

103. The electronic device of any of Items 97 - 102, the processing unit further configured to: generate a depth map based on data received from the first camera unit and the second camera unit; and wherein the simulated optical effect is based on the depth map.

103. wherein the electronic dev ice

10T The electronic device of any of items 97 automatically determines a distance to the subject.

105. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 104, wherein a second condition of the set. of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera unit exceeds a minimum distance threshold.

106. The electronic device of any of hems 97 - 105, wherein a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when a focus distance of the first camera does not exceed a maximum distance threshold.

107. The electronic device of any of items 97 -106, wherein a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the subject is detected beyond a predetermined minimum distance from the device.

108.

The electronic dev tee o fairy of items 07 ~ ί 07, wherein a fifth condition of toe set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light exceeds a minimum light threshold.

158

DK 2016 70627 A1

S 09, The electronic dewee of any of items 97 - 108, wherein a sixth condition offne set of one or more conditions is met when an amount of detected light does not exceed a maximum light threshold.

110, The electronic device of any of items 97 - 109, wherein the determination of whether the set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the first camera unit.

111. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 110, wherein the determination of whether the set of one of more conditions is met is based on data from the second camera unit.

112, The electronic device of any of items 97 - 111, the processing unit further configured to; in accordance wi th the determination that the set of one or more conditions are not met: enable display, on the display unit, of a graphical indication of a condition that is not met.

113. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 112, the processing unit further configured to: in response to detecting the subject, enable display, on the digital viewfinder on the display unit, of one or more visual markers that identify the subject; and wherein a first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers is based on whether the set of one or more conditions is met.

114. The electronic device of item 113, the processing unit further configured to;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions is met, change the first visual characteristic of the one or more visual markers,

35. The electronic device of any of items 97 -114, the processing unit further configured to: in accordance with detecting the subject, enable display, in the digital viewfinder on the display unit, of one or more visual markers identifying the subject; and wherein a second characteristic of the one or more visual markers is based on a characteristic of the subject.

159

DK 2016 70627 A1

1 6. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 11.5, ihe processing anit further configured to: in accordance with failing to detect the subject, enable display, in the digital viewfinder on the display unit, of one or more visual markers that are centered in the digital viewfinder,

117. The electronic device of any of items 97 -116, the processing unit further configured to:

in accordance with detecting a plurality' of subjects, enable display. Io the digital viewfinder on fhe display unit, of a plurality of one or more visual markers corresponding to the plurality of subjects.

118. The electronic device of any· of items 97 - 117, the processing unit further configured to: in accordance with applying the simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder, enable display, on the display unit, of a graphical indication that fee simulated optical effect is being applied to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder; and in accordance with displaying fhe preview in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect, forgo enabling display, on the display unit, of the graphical indication feat the simulated optical effect is being applied to fhe preview displayed in the digital viewfinder.

19. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 1.18, the processing unit further configured to: detect user input requesting to capture an image: and in response to detecting the user input, requesting fo capture the image:

in accordance with the determination that fee set of one or more conditions is not met, capture the image without the simulated optical effect;

in accordance with the determination that the set of one or more conditions ts met, capture fee image with the simulated optical efiecf

120. The electronic device of any of items 97 - 119. the processing unit further configured to:

while the preview is displayed in the digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect, detect a change in the scene in front of the camera units; and in response to detecting the change in the scene:

160

DK 2016 70627 A1 in accordance wife a determination feat fee change in fee scene has caused the set of one or more conditions to be met, apply ihe simulated optical effect to the preview displayed in the digital viewfinder; and in accordance with a determination that fee change in ihe scene has not caused the set of one or more conditions to be met, maintain display of ihe preview in fee digital viewfinder without applying the simulated optical effect.

161

DK 2016 70627 A1

121, An electronic device, comprising; a first camera unit, a second camera unit, a display unit, and a processing unit coupled to the first camera unit, the second camera unit, and to the display unit, the processing unit configured to:

concurrently enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from foe first camera unit that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a first magnification; and an affordance for modifying the magnification of photos captured by the device using one or more oft.be first and second camera units; detect activation of the affordance; in response to detecting activa tion of foe affordance;

cease to enable display, on the display unit, of the user interface for capturing photos based on data received from foe fust camera unit; and enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface for capturing photos based on data received from foe second camera unit that includes displaying a digital viewfinder with a second magnification that is greater than foe first magnification .

122. The electronic device of item .121, the processing unit further configured to:

detecting a user input in foe digital viewfinder;

in response to detecting foe user input;

enable display, on the display unit, of a zoom control; and perform a zoom of the digital viewfinder in accordance with foe user input.

123. The electronic device ofitem in the digital viewfinder.

322. wherein foe user input corresponds to a pinch gesture

124. The electronic device of item 122, wherein the user input corresponds to a drag gesture foe digital viewfinder.

tn

162

DK 2016 70627 A1

S 25. The electronic device of item i 22, wherein the user input corresponds to a swipe gesture in the digital viewfinder.

126. The electronic device of any of items 122 - 125, wherein the zoom control includes a zoom indicator affordance.

127. The electronic device of item 126, wherein tire zoom control includes a plurality of locations corresponding to a plural ity of magnification levels, and wherein a first location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a first optical magnification level and a second location of the plurality of locations corresponds to a second optical magnification level that is different from the first optical magnification level.

128. The electronic device of any of items 122 -127, the processing unit forther configured to: detect a gesture corresponding to the zoom control, the gesture having a direction and a in response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a first direction, perform a. zoom-out of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture; and in response to detecting the gesture corresponding to the zoom control and in accordance with the direction being a second direction different from the first direction, perform a zoom-in of the digital viewfinder at a speed based on the magnitude of the gesture.

.129. The electronic device of any of items 121 -128., wherein the affordance for modifying the magnification is displayed in accordance with a determination that the electronic device includes a plurality of cameras with overlapping fields of view.

130. The electronic device of any of items 121 -129, the processing unit further configured to:

detect a second activation of the affordance lor modifying the magnification;

in response to detecting fee second activation of the affordance for modifying the magnification:

163

DK 2016 70627 A1 cease to enable display, on the display unit, of the aser interface for capturing photos based on data received front the second camera unit; and enable display, on the display unit, of the user interface for capturing photos based on data received front the fust camera unit that includes displaying the digital viewfinder with the first magnification.

I3 S. The electronic device of any of items 122 - ί 29, wherein the displayed zoom control fades out in response to detecting an input lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digital viewfinder and wherein the displayed affordance for modifying the magnification does not fttde out in response detecting the input, lift-off signal associated with the user input in the digs tai viewfinder.

132, The electronic device of any of items 122 - i 29, wherein displaying, on the display unit, the zoom control includes replacing display of the affordance for modifyi ng the magnification with display of the zoom control.

164

DK 2016 70627 A1

133. An electron ic device, comprisi ug:

one or more camera units a display unit; and a processing unit coupled one or more camera units and to fee display unit, the processing unit configured to:

enable display, on the display unit, of:

a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more camera units;

while enabling display of the digital viewfinder, detect a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, fee gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level;

in response to detecting fee gesture, zoom the digital viewfinder from fee first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third magnification level, including:

during a first portion of the gesture, zoom the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than fee gesture rate at which fee gesture is progressing; and dining a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zoom the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

.134. The electronic device of item .133, wherein: during the first portion of fee gesture:

the gesture progresses from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state corresponds to the first magnification level and the second state corresponds to the second magnification level feat is higher than the first magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to an intermediate magnification level that is higher the first magnification level and lower than the second magnification level; and during fee second portion of the gesture;

165

DK 2016 70627 A1 the gesture progresses from the second state to a third state, wherein the third state corresponds to a third magnification level that is higher than the second magnification level and the intermediate magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from the intermediate magnification level that is Sower than the second magnification level to tire third magnification level.

ί .35. The electronic device of any of' items 133 - 134, wherein:

fee first portion of fee gesture includes movement of one or more contacts on a touchsensitive surface and the rate at which fhe first portion of fhe gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of fee one or more contacts;

the second portion of the gesture includes continued movement, of fee one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface and the rate at which the second portion of the gesture is progressin g is based on a rate of movement of the one or more con tac ts ;

ig fhe second portion of fhe gesture, the movement of fee one or more contacts ceases while fhe one or more contacts continue to be detected on the touch-sensitive surface; and fee method including continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after fee movement of the one or more contacts has ceased.

136. The electronic device of item 135. wherein continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after fee movement of the one or more contacts has ceased includes gradually decreasing fee rate at which fee magnification lev el is increasing.

137. The electronic device of any of items 133 - 135, wherein zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing the rate at which the magnification level increases when the contact moves away from a starting position on tire touch-sensitive surface.

138. The electronic device of any of items 133 -136, the processing unit further configured to.

concurrently enable display, on the dispiay unit, with the digital viewfinder, of:

a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along fee zoom control correspond to a plurality of magnification levels; and

166

DK 2016 70627 A1 a zoom indicator affordance; and in response to detecting the gesture, update display of the zoom indicator affordance to transition, at the gesture rate, from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the plurality of positions, wherein the first position corresponds to the first magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to the third magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels.

139. The electronic device of any of items 133 - 138, wherein zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes zooming the digital viewfinder while smoothing the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which the gesture progresses, by limiting the rate of the zoom or the rate of change of the rate of the zoom.

140. The electronic device of any of items .133 - 139, wherein;

during a third portion of the gesture that occurs before the first portion of the gesture zoom the digital -viewfinder at a third rate that corresponds to the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.

141. The electronic device of any of items 133 -140, wherein;

at a first time during the first portion of the gesture., zooming the digital viewfinder at the first rate while a first gesture rate of the gesture exceeds a threshold gesture rate; and at a second time during the second portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at the first rate while a second gesture rate of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate.

142. The electronic device of any of items .133 - 141, the processing unit further configured to; subsequent to detecting the gesture and subsequent to zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level;

detect a tap gesture at a location corresponding to a third position of the plurality of positions, wherein the third position corresponds to a fourth magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels; and

167

DK 2016 70627 A1 in response to detecting the tap gesture, zoom the digital viewfinder from the third magnification level to the fourth magnification level,

143. The electronic device of any of items 133 -142, the processing unit further configured tot in response to detecting the gesture, enable display, on the display unit, of a graphical magnification level indicator that indicates a current magnification level.

144, The electronic device of item 143, the processing unit further configured to;

after the graphical magnification level indictor has been displayed for a predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, cease to enable display, on the display unit, of täte graphical magnification level indictor.

145, The electronic device of any of items 138 - 144, the processing unit further configured to; after the zoom control has been displayed for a second predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, cease to enable display, on the display unit, of the zoom control.

146. The electronic device of any of items 138 -144. the processing unit further configured to; enable display, on the display unit, of the zoom control while enabling display of the digital viewfinder .147. The electronic device o fans' of items 1.33 -146. the processing unit further configured to; detect a pinch gesture on the digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the pinch gesture;

zoom the digital viewfinder at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout the pinch gesture.

148. The electronic device of any of hems 1.38 - 147. wherein the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of magnification, levels are positioned along the zoom control such that the magnification le vels are not distributed linearly.

168

DK 2016 70627 A1

149, The electronic device of any of items i 38 ·· 148, wherein a distance along ihe zoom control between the lowest magnification lev el and a magnification level that is double the lowest magnification levet extends more than 25% of a total distance of the zoom control and less than 45% of the total distance of the zoom control.

150, The electronic device of any of items 138 -149, wherein locations along the zoom control corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished from locations along the zoom control corresponding to non-optieal magnification levels.

151, The electronic device of anv of items 142 - i 50, wherein the third position offne plurality of positions corresponds to an optical magnification level.

152. The electronic device of any of items 138 ~ 151, wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control vertically on the display.

153. The electronic device of any of items 138 -152, wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control horizontally on the display.

169

DK 2016 70627 A1

154, An electronic device, comprising; a display unit; and a processing unit coupled the display unit, the processing unit configured to;

enable display, on the display unit, of a digital viewfinder;

detect a gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a second magnification level different from the first magnification determine whether a set of one or more conditions has been met, wherein a first, condition of tire set of one or more conditions is met when the difference between the second magnification level and a third magnification level is less than a predetermined threshold; and in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has been met, zoom the digital viewfinder from tire first magnification level to the third magnification level.

155, The electronic device of item 154, the processing unit lurther configured to:

in accordance wi th a detennination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, zoom the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the second magnification level.

156, The electronic device of any of items 154 - 155, wherein a second condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is less than the third magnification level.

157, The electronic device of any of items 154 - 155, wherein a third condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the second magnification level is more than the third magnification level, and the second magnification level is greater than a second predetennined threshold level.

158. The electronic device of any of items .154 - 157, wherein a fourth condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when the absolute difference between the first magnification leset

170

DK 2016 70627 A1

159. The electronic device of any of items 154 - 158, wherein the second magnification level corresponds to a digital magnification level and wherein the third magnification level corresponds to an optical magnification level.

160. The electronic device of any of items 154 - 159, wherein the electronic device includes a first camera and a second camera, and wherein the displayed digital viewfinder is based on data received from at least one of the first camera and the second camera.

161. The electronic device of item 160, wherein the digital viewfinder is based on data received from the first camera when the digital viewfinder is zoomed to the second magnification level and wherein the digital view finder is based on data received from tlie second camera when the di nital viewfinder is zoomed to the third magnification level.

162. The electronic device of any of items 154 - 161, the processing unit further configured to:

prior to detecting the gesture, concurrently enable display, on the display unit, with the digital viewfinder, of:

a zoom control , wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom control correspon to a pl urality of magnification levels;

a zoom indicator affordance at a first position of the plurality of positions along the zoom control corresponding to the first magnification level; and a target zoom point at a third posit ion of the plurality» of positions along the zoom control that is different from the first position, wherein the third position corresponds to the third magnification level; and wherein a second position of the plurality of positions along the zoom control corresponds to the second magnification level.

163. The electronic device of item 162, the processing unit further configured to:

in accordance with a determination that the set of one or mote conditions has been met, update display^1, of the zoom indicator affordance from the first position to the third position corresponding to the third magnification level.

171

DK 2016 70627 A1

S 64, The electronic desice of any of items 162 - '63, the processing unit further configured to:

in accordance with a determination that the set of one or more conditions has not been met, update display of the zoom indicator affordance from the first position to fee second position corresponding to fee second magnification level.

165. ihe electronic device of any of items 162 - 164, the processing unit further configured to;

in accordance with the determination feat the set of one or more conditions has been met.

update display of the target zoom point to expand io encapsulate the zoom indicator affordance when the zoom indicator affordance is displayed at the second position.

166, The electronic device of any of items 154 - 165, wherein a fifih condition of the set of one or more conditions is met when fee electronic device detects an input lift-off signal associated with the gesture.

167. The electronic device of any of items 160 -166? wherein the first, camera has a first field of view and the second camera has a second field of view, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view overlap, wherein the first field of view and the second field of view are different, and wherein zooming fee digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes.

’visually compensating for the difference between the first field of view and the second field of view to reduce shifting of an image displayed in fee digital viewfinder.

168. The electronic device of any of items 162 -167. fee processing unit further configured to:

while the magnification level of the digital viewfinder is a tourth magnification level that is different from fee third magnification level, detect a tap input at a location that corresponds to a respective portion of fee zoom control; and m response to detecting fee tap input:

in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to fee third magnification level, zoom the digital viewfinder to the third magnification level; and

172

DK 2016 70627 A1 in accordance with a determination that the respective portion of the zoom control corresponds to a magnification level that is different from the third magnification level maintain the digital viewfinder at the fourth magnification level [0449] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order io best explain the principles ofthe techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize tlie techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

[0450] Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted ihat various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in tlie art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included w ithin the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.

[04511 As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to improve the delivery to users of invitational content or any other content that may he of interest to them . The present disclosure contemplates that In some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal infonnation data can include demographic data, location-based data, telephone number's, email addresses, home addresses, or any other identifying information.

[0452] The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can he used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information data can be used to deliver targeted content that is of greater interest to the user. Accordingly, use of such personal inforniation data enables calculated control ofthe delivered content. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.

173

DK 2016 70627 A1 [0453] The present disclosure further contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices, In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. For example, personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection should occur only after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities would take any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such, personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices, ]04541 Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of advertisement delivery sendees, the present technology can he configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services. In another example, users can select not to provide location information for targeted content delivery services, in yet another example, users can select to not provide precise location information, but permit the transfer of location zone information.

[0455] Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also he implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, content can be selected and delivered to users by inferring preferences based ou non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as the content being requested by the device associated with a user, other non174

DK 2016 70627 A1 personal information available to the content delivery services, or publically available information.

1,75

DK 2016 70627 A1

Claims

What is claimed is:

1. A method, comprising.

at an electronic device with one or more cameras and a display: displaying, on the display:

a digital viewfinder based on data received from the one or more cameras; while displaying the digital viewfinder, detecting a gesture that progresses at a gesture rate, the gesture corresponding to an instruction to zoom the digital viewfinder from a first magnification level to a third magnification level;

in response to detecting the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to a second magnification level and from the second magnification level to a third, magnification level, including:

during a first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a first rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing; and during a second portion of the gesture that occurs after the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at a second rate that is faster than the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.
2. The method of claim I, wherein: during the first portion of the gesture:

the gesture progresses from a first state to a second state, wherein the first state corresponds to the first magnification level and the second state corresponds to the second magnification level that is higher than the first magnification level; and zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to an intermediate magnification level that is higher the first magnification level and lower than the second magnification level; and during the second portion of the gesture:

the gesture progresses from the second state to a third state, wherein the third state corresponds to a third magnification level that is higher than täte second magnification level and the intermediate magnification level; and

176

DK 2016 70627 A1 zooming the digital viewfinder from the intermediate magnification level that is lower than the second mannification level to the third magnification level.

The method of any of claims I - 2. wherein;

the first portion of the gesture includes movement of one or more contacts on a touchsensitive surface and the rate at which the first portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or snore contacts;

foe second portion of the gesture includes continued movement of the one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface and the rate at which the second portion of the gesture is progressing is based on a rate of movement of the one or more contacts;

during the second portion of foe gesture, the movement of the one or more contacts ceases while foe one or more contacts continue to he detected on the touch-sensitive surface; and the method including continuing to zoom the digital viewfinder after the movement of foe one or more contacts has ceased.
4, The method of claim 3. wherein continuing to zoom the digital view finder after foe movement of the one or more contacts has ceased includes gradually decreasing the rate af. which foe magnification level is increasing.

The method of anv of claims 1 -3, wherein zooming foe digital viewfinder at a rate that is slower than the gesture rate at which foe gesture is progressing includes gradually increasing foe rate at which foe magnification level increases when foe contact moves away from a starting positron on the touch-sensitive surface.
6. The method of any of claims 1. - 3, further comprising;

concurrently displaying, on the display, with foe digital viewfinder;

a zoom control, wherein a plurality of positions along the zoom controi correspond to a plurality of magnification levels; and a zoom indicator affordance; and in response to detecting the gesture, updating display of the zoom indicator a ffordance to transition, at the gesture rate, from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second

1.77

DK 2016 70627 A1 position ofthe plurality of positions, wherein the first position corresponds to the first magnification level ofthe plurality of magnification levels and the second position corresponds to the third magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels.
7. The method of any of claims 1 - 6, wherein zooming foe digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level includes zooming the digital viewfinder while smoothing the rate at which the zooming occurs relative to the rate at which the gesture progresses, by limiting the rate ofthe zoom or the rate of change of foe rate of fire zoom.
8,

The method of any of claims 1 ~ 7, wherein:

dining a third portion ofthe gesture that occurs before the rst portion of the gesture.

zooming the digital viewfinder at a third rate that corresponds to the gesture rate at which the gesture is progressing.
9. The method of any of claims 1-8, wherein:

at a first time during the first portion of the gesture, zooming the digital viewfinder at the first rate while a first gesture rate of the gesture exceeds a threshold gesture nite; and at a second time during the second portion of the gesture , zooming the digital viewfinder at the first rate while a second gesture rate of the gesture does not exceed the threshold gesture rate.

.
10. The method of any of claims .1 ~ 9, further comprising:

subsequent to detecting the gesture and subsequent to zooming the digital viewfinder from the first magnification level to the third magnification level:

detecting a tap gesture at a location corresponding to a third position of the plurality of positions, wherein the third position corresponds to a fourth magnification level of the plurality of magnification levels; and in response to detecting foe tap gesture, zooming foe digital viewfinder from the third magnification level to the fourth magnification level,
11, The method of any of claims 1 - 10, further comprising:

178

DK 2016 70627 A1 in response to detecting the gesture, displaying, on the display, a graphical magnification level indicator that indicates a current magnification level.
12. The method of'claim 11, further comprising;

after the graphical magnification level indictor has been displayed for a predetermined period of rime after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, ceasing to display, on the display, the graphical magnification level indictor,
13. The method of any of claims 6 - 12. ftirther comprising;

after the zoom control has been displayed for a second predetermined period of time after zooming of the digital viewfinder has ceased, ceasing to display, on the display, the zoom control.
14, The method of any of claims 6 - 12, further comprising;

displaying, on the display, the zoom control while displaying the digital viewfinder.

fo. The method of any of claims 1 - 14, further comprising;

detecting a pinch gesture on the digital viewfinder; in response to detecting the pinch gesture;

zooming the digital viewfinder at a rate corresponding to a rate at which the pinch gesture is progressing throughout the pinch gesture.
16. The method of any of claims 6 -15. wherein the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of magnification levels are positioned along the zoom control such that the magnification levels are not distributed linearly.
17. The method of any of claims 6 - 16, wherein a distance along the zoom control between the lowest magnification level and a magnification level that is double the lowest magnification level extends more than 25% of a total distance of the zoom control and less than 45% of the total distance of the zoom control.

179

DK 2016 70627 A1
18, The method of any of claims 6-17, wherein locations along the zoom control corresponding to optical magnification levels are visually distinguished from locations along the zoom control corresponding to non-optical magnification levels,
19. The method of any of claims 10 - IS, wherein the third position of the plurality of positions corresponds to an optical magnification level.
20. The method of any of claims 10 -19, wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control vertically on tire display.
21. The method of any of claims 1.0 - 20, wherein displaying the zoom control includes displaying the zoom control horizontally on the display.
22. A computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a device with one or more cameras and a display, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any of claims .1-21.

23. An electronic device, comprising;

one or more cameras, a display;

one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions tor performing the method of any of claims 121.

ISO

DK 2016 70627 A1

I/O Subsystem

Display Optical Sensors) Intensity Sensor(s) Haptic Feedback Other Input Controllers) Contra ier158 i i Controller 158 Controller 159 Controller 161 160 I 1 P103 ,Π03 i^103 1^103 ιΠ03 Touch- Optical Contact Tactile Output Other Input Sensitive Sensors) Intensity Generators) Control Devices Display System 164 Sensor(s) 167 116 112 165

/76. £4

DK 2016 70627 A1

126

128

130

132

133

134 .130 .137 .138 .139 .140

141 .142 .143 .144

147

148

149 .149-1 . 149-2

149-3 149-4 .149-5 . 149-6 .150 .151 152 .360 .382 .384 .386 .388 .390

157

FJG. 3

DK 2016 70627 A1

Portable Multifunction Device -s,

1Β.ΞΞ 2k

Messages

424

Calendar

425

Photos

428

Camera

430

Online Video 432

Stocks

434 o

(<7j

Clock

440

Notes

444 iTunes Voice Memos

Q O ©

Weather

Utilities pi

Microphone

Accelerometer(s)

168

Touch Screen 112 c

113

FfG. 4,4

DK 2016 70627 A1

DK 2016 70627 A1 /

---6 ~4

INTENSITY

MEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY SENSOR

524Ä

INTENSITY

MEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY SENSOR

524B

INTENSITY

MEASUREMENT OF INTENSITY SENSOR

524D f/o;

INTENSITY

MEASUREMENT

OF INTENSITY

SENSOR

524C

DK 2016 70627 A1

- 12 “ 12 —12 - 12 - _i0 - io ~ 10 — 10 7 ~ 8 - ~8 ~ 8 ~8 ,...··· z -6 z z ~6 .... ** ό —- ~6 Z z z ... 4 z -4 ... ..... · 4 -4 z z z / z _e.·· ~2 z ”2 — Ί z ™2 z z z z| z

/ /

' 10 /

INTENSITY OF INTENSITY OF INTENSITY OF INTENSITY OF INTENSITY OF

CONTACT 552A

CONTACT

552B

CONTACT

552C

CONTACT

552E

CONTACT

552D

DK 2016 70627 A1 ^JD

IT,

IT

INTENSITY OF

CONTACT

562

DK 2016 70627 A1

DISPLAY

FR.

INTENSITY OF

CONTACT

562

DK 2016 70627 A1

DISPLAY

S72B

INTENSITY OF

CONTACT

562

DK 2016 70627 A1

T ^ITI.

!

rr,

INTENSITY OF

CONTACT

562

DK 2016 70627 A1

DK 2016 70627 A1 / *

SQUARE VIDEO PORTRAIT PHOTO PANO TIME-LÄFSE^LO-MQ

...................................OJA..............

DK 2016 70627 A1

600

DK 2016 70627 A1

600

PHOTO PANO TIME-LAPSE

..................................QFF

DK 2016 70627 A1

600

DK 2016 70627 A1

600

DK 2016 70627 A1

600

660 r~r~<—Γ?—:— '«kW'· ?%·<> ν'-,', 6/ ν'*',.' Λ

-/ *3' -?·?;' 3’ ·? : <7.*·- <·,;?; VΈ^:·' $; % <

• .·.. -·>. ,·, »♦*;· *.. · ·:*..< ·λ·\· · ,-,ν

THE PICTURE iS TOO DARK,

MORE IJOHT NEEDED SLO-MO SQUARE VIDEO PORTRAIT PHOTO PANO TIME-LAPSE

642

...Gc

DK 2016 70627 A1

600 rty'Xyj.n;,'·' ,Λ?·ί*?!ϊ*

-u /-680

SLO-MØ SQUARE VIDEO PORTRAIT PHOTO PÄNO TIME-LAPSE /•-617